removed trailing whitespace in Doxygen files
git-svn-id: https://svn.wxwidgets.org/svn/wx/wxWidgets/trunk@52634 c3d73ce0-8a6f-49c7-b76d-6d57e0e08775
This commit is contained in:
parent
7df4c51f60
commit
3c4f71cc3d
@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ The following are relevant to the GDI (Graphics Device Interface).
|
||||
|
||||
@warning These functions are deprecated, use the wxClipboard class instead.
|
||||
|
||||
These clipboard functions are implemented for Windows only.
|
||||
These clipboard functions are implemented for Windows only.
|
||||
|
||||
@header{wx/clipbrd.h}
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -29,7 +29,7 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@section page_cppconst_guisystem GUI system
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@beginDefList
|
||||
@itemdef{__WINDOWS__, any Windows, you may also use __WXMSW__}
|
||||
@itemdef{__WIN16__, Win16 API (not supported since wxWidgets 2.6)}
|
||||
@ -48,7 +48,7 @@
|
||||
@itemdef{__WXMOTIF20__, Motif 2.0 or higher}
|
||||
@itemdef{__WXMAC__, Mac OS all targets}
|
||||
@itemdef{__WXMAC_CLASSIC__, MacOS for Classic}
|
||||
@itemdef{__WXMAC_CARBON__, MacOS for Carbon CFM (running under Classic or OSX)
|
||||
@itemdef{__WXMAC_CARBON__, MacOS for Carbon CFM (running under Classic or OSX)
|
||||
or true OS X Mach-O Builds}
|
||||
@itemdef{__WXMAC_OSX__, MacOS X Carbon Mach-O Builds}
|
||||
@itemdef{__WXMGL__, SciTech Soft MGL (__WXUNIVERSAL__ will be also defined)}
|
||||
@ -64,33 +64,33 @@
|
||||
to one of the symbols above so this should be tested first.}
|
||||
@itemdef{__X__, any X11-based GUI toolkit except GTK+}
|
||||
@endDefList
|
||||
|
||||
There are two wxWidgets ports to Mac OS. One of them, wxMac, exists in two versions:
|
||||
Classic and Carbon. The Classic version is the only one to work on Mac OS version 8.
|
||||
|
||||
There are two wxWidgets ports to Mac OS. One of them, wxMac, exists in two versions:
|
||||
Classic and Carbon. The Classic version is the only one to work on Mac OS version 8.
|
||||
The Carbon version may be built either as CFM or Mach-O (binary format, like ELF)
|
||||
and the former may run under OS 9 while the latter only runs under OS X.
|
||||
Finally, there is a new Cocoa port which can only be used under OS X. To
|
||||
summarize:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@li If you want to test for all Mac platforms, classic and OS X, you
|
||||
should test both @c __WXMAC__ and @c __WXCOCOA__.
|
||||
@li If you want to test for any GUI Mac port under OS X, use
|
||||
@c __WXOSX__.
|
||||
@li If you want to test for any port under Mac OS X, including, for
|
||||
example, wxGTK and also wxBase, use @c __DARWIN__ (see below).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The convention is to use the @c __WX prefix for these
|
||||
symbols, although this has not always been followed.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@section page_cppconst_os Operating systems
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@beginDefList
|
||||
@itemdef{__APPLE__, any Mac OS version}
|
||||
@itemdef{__AIX__, AIX}
|
||||
@itemdef{__BSD__, Any *BSD system}
|
||||
@itemdef{__CYGWIN__, Cygwin: Unix on Win32}
|
||||
@itemdef{__DARWIN__, Mac OS X using the BSD Unix C library
|
||||
@itemdef{__DARWIN__, Mac OS X using the BSD Unix C library
|
||||
(as opposed to using the Metrowerks MSL C/C++ library)}
|
||||
@itemdef{__DATA_GENERAL__, DG-UX}
|
||||
@itemdef{__DOS_GENERAL__, DOS (used with wxMGL only)}
|
||||
@ -116,12 +116,12 @@
|
||||
@endDefList
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@section page_cppconst_cpu Hardware architectures (CPU)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Note that not all of these symbols are always defined, it depends on the
|
||||
compiler used.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@beginDefList
|
||||
@itemdef{__ALPHA__, DEC Alpha architecture}
|
||||
@itemdef{__INTEL__, Intel i386 or compatible}
|
||||
@ -130,9 +130,9 @@
|
||||
@endDefList
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@section page_cppconst_hardware Hardware type
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@beginDefList
|
||||
@itemdef{__SMARTPHONE__, Generic mobile devices with phone buttons and a small display}
|
||||
@itemdef{__PDA__, Personal digital assistant, usually with touch screen}
|
||||
@ -144,9 +144,9 @@
|
||||
@endDefList
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@section page_cppconst_compiler Compilers
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@beginDefList
|
||||
@itemdef{__BORLANDC__, Borland C++. The value of the macro corresponds
|
||||
to the compiler version: $500$ is $5.0$.}
|
||||
@ -159,10 +159,10 @@
|
||||
@itemdef{__SUNCC__, Sun CC, see also wxCHECK_SUNCC_VERSION}
|
||||
@itemdef{__SYMANTECC__, Symantec C++}
|
||||
@itemdef{__VISAGECPP__, IBM Visual Age (OS/2)}
|
||||
@itemdef{__VISUALC__, Microsoft Visual C++, see also wxCHECK_VISUALC_VERSION.
|
||||
The value of this macro corresponds to the compiler version:
|
||||
@c 1020 for @c 4.2 (the first supported version), @c 1100 for
|
||||
@c 5.0, @c 1200 for @c 6.0 and so on. For convenience, the symbols
|
||||
@itemdef{__VISUALC__, Microsoft Visual C++, see also wxCHECK_VISUALC_VERSION.
|
||||
The value of this macro corresponds to the compiler version:
|
||||
@c 1020 for @c 4.2 (the first supported version), @c 1100 for
|
||||
@c 5.0, @c 1200 for @c 6.0 and so on. For convenience, the symbols
|
||||
__VISUALCn__ are also defined for each major compiler version from
|
||||
5 to 9, i.e. you can use tests such @ifdef_ __VISUALC7__ to test
|
||||
for compiler version being precisely 7.}
|
||||
@ -173,17 +173,17 @@
|
||||
@endDefList
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@section page_cppconst_featuretests Feature tests
|
||||
|
||||
Some library features may not be always available even if they were selected
|
||||
|
||||
Some library features may not be always available even if they were selected
|
||||
by the user. To make it possible to check if this is the case, the library
|
||||
predefines the symbols in the form @c wxHAS_FEATURE. Unlike
|
||||
predefines the symbols in the form @c wxHAS_FEATURE. Unlike
|
||||
@c wxUSE_FEATURE symbols which are defined by the library user (directly
|
||||
in @c setup.h or by running configure script) and which must be always
|
||||
defined as either $0$ or $1$, the @c wxHAS symbols are only defined if
|
||||
the corresponding feature is available and not defined at all otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Currently the following symbols exist:
|
||||
|
||||
@beginDefList
|
||||
@ -198,15 +198,15 @@
|
||||
@endDefList
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@section page_cppconst_miscellaneous Miscellaneous
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@beginDefList
|
||||
@itemdef{__WXWINDOWS__,
|
||||
always defined in wxWidgets applications, see also wxCHECK_VERSION}
|
||||
@itemdef{__WXDEBUG__, defined in debug mode, undefined in release mode}
|
||||
@itemdef{wxUSE_XXX,
|
||||
if defined as $1$, feature XXX is active, see the
|
||||
if defined as $1$, feature XXX is active, see the
|
||||
@ref page_wxusedef (the symbols of this form are always defined,
|
||||
use @if_ and not @ifdef_ to test for them)}
|
||||
@itemdef{WX_PRECOMP,
|
||||
@ -227,20 +227,20 @@
|
||||
building wxBase code, either as a standalone library or as part of the
|
||||
monolithic wxWidgets library, defined as $0$ when building GUI library only)}
|
||||
@itemdef{wxNO_RTTI, is defined if the compiler RTTI support has been switched off}
|
||||
@itemdef{wxNO_EXCEPTIONS,
|
||||
@itemdef{wxNO_EXCEPTIONS,
|
||||
is defined if the compiler support for C++ exceptions has been switched off}
|
||||
@itemdef{wxNO_THREADS,
|
||||
@itemdef{wxNO_THREADS,
|
||||
if this macro is defined, the compilation options
|
||||
don't include compiler flags needed for multithreaded code generation. This
|
||||
implies that wxUSE_THREADS is $0$ and also that other (non-wx-based) threading
|
||||
packages cannot be used neither.}
|
||||
@itemdef{WXMAKINGDLL_XXX,
|
||||
@itemdef{WXMAKINGDLL_XXX,
|
||||
used internally and defined when building the
|
||||
library @c XXX as a DLL; when a monolithic wxWidgets build is used only a
|
||||
single @c WXMAKINGDLL symbol is defined}
|
||||
@itemdef{WXUSINGDLL,
|
||||
@itemdef{WXUSINGDLL,
|
||||
defined when compiling code which uses wxWidgets as a DLL/shared library}
|
||||
@itemdef{WXBUILDING,
|
||||
@itemdef{WXBUILDING,
|
||||
defined when building wxWidgets itself, whether as a static or shared library}
|
||||
@endDefList
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -10,12 +10,12 @@
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
@page page_keycodes Keycodes
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@header{wx/defs.h}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Keypresses are represented by an enumerated type, wxKeyCode. The possible
|
||||
values are the ASCII character codes, plus the following:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@verbatim
|
||||
WXK_BACK = 8
|
||||
WXK_TAB = 9
|
||||
@ -23,7 +23,7 @@
|
||||
WXK_ESCAPE = 27
|
||||
WXK_SPACE = 32
|
||||
WXK_DELETE = 127
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
// These are by design not compatible with unicode characters.
|
||||
// If you want to get a unicode character from a key event use
|
||||
// wxKeyEvent::GetUnicodeKey instead.
|
||||
@ -95,7 +95,7 @@
|
||||
WXK_SCROLL
|
||||
WXK_PAGEUP,
|
||||
WXK_PAGEDOWN,
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
WXK_NUMPAD_SPACE,
|
||||
WXK_NUMPAD_TAB,
|
||||
WXK_NUMPAD_ENTER,
|
||||
@ -121,13 +121,13 @@
|
||||
WXK_NUMPAD_SUBTRACT,
|
||||
WXK_NUMPAD_DECIMAL,
|
||||
WXK_NUMPAD_DIVIDE,
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
// the following key codes are only generated under Windows currently
|
||||
WXK_WINDOWS_LEFT,
|
||||
WXK_WINDOWS_RIGHT,
|
||||
WXK_WINDOWS_MENU,
|
||||
WXK_COMMAND,
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
// Hardware-specific buttons
|
||||
WXK_SPECIAL1 = 193,
|
||||
WXK_SPECIAL2,
|
||||
|
@ -10,11 +10,11 @@
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
@page page_keymodifiers Key Modifiers
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@header{wx/defs.h}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The following key modifier constants are defined:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@verbatim
|
||||
enum wxKeyModifier
|
||||
{
|
||||
@ -32,11 +32,11 @@
|
||||
wxMOD_ALL = 0xffff
|
||||
};
|
||||
@endverbatim
|
||||
|
||||
Notice that @c wxMOD_CMD should be used instead of @c wxMOD_CONTROL
|
||||
in portable code to account for the fact that although
|
||||
|
||||
Notice that @c wxMOD_CMD should be used instead of @c wxMOD_CONTROL
|
||||
in portable code to account for the fact that although
|
||||
@c Control modifier exists under Mac OS, it is not used for the same
|
||||
purpose as under Windows or Unix there while the special Mac-specific
|
||||
purpose as under Windows or Unix there while the special Mac-specific
|
||||
@c Command modifier is used in exactly the same way.
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
@ -10,15 +10,15 @@
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
@page page_languagecodes Language identifiers
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The following wxLanguage constants may be used to specify the language
|
||||
in wxLocale::Init and are returned by wxLocale::GetSystemLanguage:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<!-- generated code begins here -->
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
This enum is generated by misc/languages/genlang.py
|
||||
When making changes, please put them into misc/languages/langtabl.txt
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<!-- generated code ends here -->
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
@ -13,26 +13,26 @@
|
||||
|
||||
wxWidgets defines a special identifier value @c wxID_ANY which is used in
|
||||
the following two situations:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@li when creating a new window you may specify @c wxID_ANY to let
|
||||
wxWidgets assign an unused identifier to it automatically
|
||||
@li when installing an event handler using either the event table
|
||||
macros or wxEvtHandler::Connect,
|
||||
you may use it to indicate that you want to handle the events
|
||||
coming from any control, regardless of its identifier
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Another standard special identifier value is @c wxID_NONE: this is a value
|
||||
which is not matched by any other id.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxWidgets also defines a few standard command identifiers which may be used by
|
||||
the user code and also are sometimes used by wxWidgets itself. These reserved
|
||||
identifiers are all in the range between @c wxID_LOWEST and
|
||||
identifiers are all in the range between @c wxID_LOWEST and
|
||||
@c wxID_HIGHEST and, accordingly, the user code should avoid defining its
|
||||
own constants in this range.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@verbatim
|
||||
wxID_LOWEST = 4999,
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxID_OPEN,
|
||||
wxID_CLOSE,
|
||||
wxID_NEW,
|
||||
@ -55,7 +55,7 @@
|
||||
wxID_HELP_PROCEDURES,
|
||||
wxID_HELP_CONTEXT,
|
||||
wxID_CLOSE_ALL,
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxID_EDIT = 5030,
|
||||
wxID_CUT,
|
||||
wxID_COPY,
|
||||
@ -68,7 +68,7 @@
|
||||
wxID_REPLACE,
|
||||
wxID_REPLACE_ALL,
|
||||
wxID_PROPERTIES,
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxID_VIEW_DETAILS,
|
||||
wxID_VIEW_LARGEICONS,
|
||||
wxID_VIEW_SMALLICONS,
|
||||
@ -77,7 +77,7 @@
|
||||
wxID_VIEW_SORTNAME,
|
||||
wxID_VIEW_SORTSIZE,
|
||||
wxID_VIEW_SORTTYPE,
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxID_FILE = 5050,
|
||||
wxID_FILE1,
|
||||
wxID_FILE2,
|
||||
@ -88,7 +88,7 @@
|
||||
wxID_FILE7,
|
||||
wxID_FILE8,
|
||||
wxID_FILE9,
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
// Standard button IDs
|
||||
wxID_OK = 5100,
|
||||
wxID_CANCEL,
|
||||
@ -108,14 +108,14 @@
|
||||
wxID_ABORT,
|
||||
wxID_RETRY,
|
||||
wxID_IGNORE,
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxID_UP,
|
||||
wxID_DOWN,
|
||||
wxID_HOME,
|
||||
wxID_REFRESH,
|
||||
wxID_STOP,
|
||||
wxID_INDEX,
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxID_BOLD,
|
||||
wxID_ITALIC,
|
||||
wxID_JUSTIFY_CENTER,
|
||||
@ -131,7 +131,7 @@
|
||||
wxID_ZOOM_OUT,
|
||||
wxID_UNDELETE,
|
||||
wxID_REVERT_TO_SAVED,
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
// System menu IDs (used by wxUniv):
|
||||
wxID_SYSTEM_MENU = 5200,
|
||||
wxID_CLOSE_FRAME,
|
||||
@ -140,10 +140,10 @@
|
||||
wxID_MAXIMIZE_FRAME,
|
||||
wxID_ICONIZE_FRAME,
|
||||
wxID_RESTORE_FRAME,
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
// IDs used by generic file dialog (13 consecutive starting from this value)
|
||||
wxID_FILEDLGG = 5900,
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxID_HIGHEST = 5999
|
||||
@endverbatim
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -35,7 +35,7 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@section page_wxusedef_multi Generic wxUSE preprocessor symbols
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@beginDefList
|
||||
@itemdef{wxUSE_ABOUTDLG, Use wxAboutDialogInfo class.}
|
||||
@itemdef{wxUSE_ACCEL, Use wxAcceleratorTable/Entry classes and support for them in wxMenu, wxMenuBar.}
|
||||
@ -238,7 +238,7 @@
|
||||
@itemdef{wxUSE_XRC, Use XRC XML-based resource system.}
|
||||
@itemdef{wxUSE_ZIPSTREAM, Enable streams for Zip files.}
|
||||
@itemdef{wxUSE_ZLIB, Use wxZlibInput and wxZlibOutputStream classes, required by wxUSE_LIBPNG.}
|
||||
@endDefList
|
||||
@endDefList
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@section page_wxusedef_unix wxUSE preprocessor symbols used only under Unix platforms
|
||||
@ -259,10 +259,10 @@
|
||||
@itemdef{wxUSE_NANOX, Use NanoX.}
|
||||
@itemdef{wxUSE_UNIV_TEXTCTRL, Use wxUniv's implementation of wxTextCtrl class.}
|
||||
@endDefList
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@section page_wxusedef_gtk wxUSE preprocessor symbols used only in wxGTK port
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@beginDefList
|
||||
@itemdef{wxUSE_DETECT_SM, Use code to detect X11 session manager.}
|
||||
@itemdef{wxUSE_GTKPRINT, Use GTK+ printing support.}
|
||||
@ -271,9 +271,9 @@
|
||||
@itemdef{wxUSE_LIBHILDON, Use Hildon framework for Nokia 770. Currently has no effect. }
|
||||
@endDefList
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@section page_wxusedef_mac wxUSE preprocessor symbols used only in wxMac port
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@beginDefList
|
||||
@itemdef{wxUSE_MAC_CRITICAL_REGION_MUTEX, See src/mac/carbon/thread.cpp file.}
|
||||
@itemdef{wxUSE_MAC_PTHREADS_MUTEX, See src/mac/carbon/thread.cpp file.}
|
||||
@ -281,24 +281,24 @@
|
||||
@itemdef{wxUSE_WEBKIT, Use wxWebKitCtrl class.}
|
||||
@endDefList
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@section page_wxusedef_motif wxUSE preprocessor symbols used only in wxMotif port
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@beginDefList
|
||||
@itemdef{wxUSE_GADGETS, Use xmCascadeButtonGadgetClass, xmLabelGadgetClass, xmPushButtonGadgetClass and xmToggleButtonGadgetClass classes.}
|
||||
@itemdef{wxUSE_INVISIBLE_RESIZE, See src/motif/dialog.cpp file.}
|
||||
@endDefList
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@section page_wxusedef_cocoa wxUSE preprocessor symbols used only in Cocoa port
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@beginDefList
|
||||
@itemdef{wxUSE_OBJC_UNIQUIFYING, Enable Objective-C class name uniquifying.}
|
||||
@endDefList
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@section page_wxusedef_os2 wxUSE preprocessor symbols used only in OS2 port
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@beginDefList
|
||||
@itemdef{wxUSE_CONSOLEDEBUG, See src/os2/app.cpp file.}
|
||||
@itemdef{wxUSE_DDE, See src/os2/mimetype.cpp file.}
|
||||
@ -308,9 +308,9 @@
|
||||
@itemdef{wxUSE_RESOURCE_LOADING_IN_OS2, See src/os2/gdiimage.cpp file.}
|
||||
@endDefList
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@section page_wxusedef_msw wxUSE preprocessor symbols used only in wxMSW port
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@beginDefList
|
||||
@itemdef{wxUSE_ACCESSIBILITY, Enable accessibility support}
|
||||
@itemdef{wxUSE_ACTIVEX, Use wxActiveXContainer and related classes.}
|
||||
@ -345,9 +345,9 @@
|
||||
@itemdef{wxUSE_XPM_IN_MSW, See also wxUSE_XPM}
|
||||
@endDefList
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@section page_wxusedef_univ wxUSE preprocessor symbols used only in wxUniversal
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@beginDefList
|
||||
@itemdef{wxUSE_ALL_THEMES, Use all themes in wxUniversal; See wx/univ/theme.h file.}
|
||||
@itemdef{wxUSE_THEME_GTK, Use GTK+ 1-like theme in wxUniversal}
|
||||
|
@ -35,7 +35,7 @@
|
||||
Julian Smart, Robert Roebling, Vadim Zeitlin, Vaclav Slavik and many others.
|
||||
|
||||
This manual contains a class reference and topic overviews.
|
||||
For a selection of wxWidgets tutorials, please see the documentation page
|
||||
For a selection of wxWidgets tutorials, please see the documentation page
|
||||
on the wxWidgets web site: http://www.wxwidgets.org.
|
||||
|
||||
Please note that in the following, ``MS Windows" often refers to all
|
||||
|
@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ Requires @ref page_libs_wxbase.
|
||||
|
||||
This contains the Advanced User Interface docking library.
|
||||
|
||||
Requires @ref page_libs_wxadv, @ref page_libs_wxhtml, @ref page_libs_wxxml,
|
||||
Requires @ref page_libs_wxadv, @ref page_libs_wxhtml, @ref page_libs_wxxml,
|
||||
@ref page_libs_wxcore, @ref page_libs_wxbase.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ Requires @ref page_libs_wxbase.
|
||||
|
||||
This contains generic rich text control functionality.
|
||||
|
||||
Requires @ref page_libs_wxadv, @ref page_libs_wxhtml, @ref page_libs_wxxml,
|
||||
Requires @ref page_libs_wxadv, @ref page_libs_wxhtml, @ref page_libs_wxxml,
|
||||
@ref page_libs_wxcore, @ref page_libs_wxbase.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ Requires @ref page_libs_wxxml, @ref page_libs_wxcore, @ref page_libs_wxbase.
|
||||
This library contains wxXmlResource class that provides access to XML resource
|
||||
files in XRC format.
|
||||
|
||||
Requires @ref page_libs_wxadv, @ref page_libs_wxhtml, @ref page_libs_wxxml,
|
||||
Requires @ref page_libs_wxadv, @ref page_libs_wxhtml, @ref page_libs_wxxml,
|
||||
@ref page_libs_wxcore, @ref page_libs_wxbase.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -31,48 +31,48 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@section page_port_wxgtk wxGTK
|
||||
@section page_port_wxgtk wxGTK
|
||||
|
||||
@htmlonly
|
||||
<img src="gtk_logo.png" alt="GTK logo" title="GTK logo" class="logo">
|
||||
@endhtmlonly
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxGTK is a port of wxWidgets using the GTK+ library.
|
||||
It makes use of GTK+'s native widgets wherever possible and uses
|
||||
wxWidgets' generic controls when needed. GTK+ itself has been
|
||||
ported to a number of systems, but so far only the original X11
|
||||
version is supported. Support for other GTK+ backends is planned,
|
||||
such as the new DirectFB backend.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
All work is being done on GTK+ version 2.0 and above. Support for
|
||||
GTK+ 1.2 will be deprecated in a later release.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
You will need GTK+ 2.0 or higher which is available from:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
http://www.gtk.org
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The newer version of GTK+ you use, the more native widgets and
|
||||
features will be utilized. We have gone to a great extent to
|
||||
allow compiling wxWidgets applications with a latest version of
|
||||
GTK+, with the resulting binary working on systems even with a
|
||||
much lower version of GTK+. You will have to ensure that the
|
||||
application is launched with lazy symbol binding for that.
|
||||
|
||||
In order to configure wxWidgets to compile wxGTK you will
|
||||
|
||||
In order to configure wxWidgets to compile wxGTK you will
|
||||
need use the @c --with-gtk argument to the @c configure script.
|
||||
This is the default for many systems.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GTK+ 1.2 can still be used, albeit discouraged. For that you can
|
||||
pass @c --with-gtk=1 to the @c configure script.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
For further information, please see the files in docs/gtk
|
||||
in the distribution.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@section page_port_wxmac wxMac
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@section page_port_wxmac wxMac
|
||||
|
||||
@htmlonly
|
||||
<img src="osxleopard_logo.png" alt="Mac OS X (Leopard) logo"
|
||||
title="Mac OS X (Leopard) logo" class="logo">
|
||||
@ -88,15 +88,15 @@
|
||||
API (and optionally the Classic API under MacOS 8.X). You
|
||||
will need wxWidgets version 2.3.3 or higher for a stable
|
||||
version of wxMac.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
For further information, please see the files in docs/mac
|
||||
in the distribution.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@section page_port_wxmgl wxMGL
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@section page_port_wxmgl wxMGL
|
||||
|
||||
wxMGL is a port of wxWidgets using the MGL library available
|
||||
from SciTech as the underlying graphics backend. wxMGL draws
|
||||
its widgets using the wxUniversal widget set which is now
|
||||
@ -104,35 +104,35 @@
|
||||
including DOS, Linux hardware (similar to the Linux framebuffer)
|
||||
and various graphics systems such as Win32, X11 and OS/2.
|
||||
Note that currently MGL for Linux runs only on x86-based systems.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
You will need wxWidgets 2.3.3 or higher and MGL 5.0 or higher.
|
||||
The latter is available from
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
http://www.scitechsoft.com/products/product_download.html
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
In order to configure wxWidgets to compile wxMGL you will
|
||||
need to type:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@verbatim configure --with-mgl --with-universal @endverbatim
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Under DOS, wxMGL uses a dmake based make system.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
For further information, please see the files in docs/mgl
|
||||
in the distribution.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@section page_port_wxos2 wxOS2
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@section page_port_wxos2 wxOS2
|
||||
|
||||
wxOS2 is a port of wxWidgets for the IBM OS/2 Warp3 and Warp4 platforms.
|
||||
This port is currently under construction and in beta phase.
|
||||
|
||||
For more info about OS2 see:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@section page_port_wxx11 wxX11
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@section page_port_wxx11 wxX11
|
||||
|
||||
@htmlonly
|
||||
<img src="x11_logo.png" alt="X.org logo" title="X.org logo" class="logo">
|
||||
@ -145,21 +145,21 @@
|
||||
as those running on systems with few resources (PDAs) or for
|
||||
applications which need to use a special themed look. You will need
|
||||
wxWidgets 2.3.2 or higher.
|
||||
|
||||
In order to configure wxWidgets to compile wxX11 you will
|
||||
|
||||
In order to configure wxWidgets to compile wxX11 you will
|
||||
need to type:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@verbatim configure --with-x11 --with-universal @endverbatim
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
For further information, please see the files in docs/x11
|
||||
in the distribution. There is also a page on the use of
|
||||
wxWidgets for embedded applications on the wxWidgets web site.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@section page_port_wxmsw wxMSW
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@section page_port_wxmsw wxMSW
|
||||
|
||||
@htmlonly
|
||||
<img src="win_logo.png" alt="Windows logo" title="Windows logo" class="logo">
|
||||
@ -174,35 +174,35 @@
|
||||
including MS VC++, Borland 5.5, MinGW32, Cygwin and
|
||||
Watcom as well as cross-compilation with a Linux hosted
|
||||
MinGW32 tool chain.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
For further information, please see the files in docs/msw
|
||||
in the distribution.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_port_wxmsw_themedborders Themed borders on Windows
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Starting with wxWidgets 2.8.5, you can specify the wxBORDER_THEME style to have wxWidgets
|
||||
use a themed border. Using the default XP theme, this is a thin 1-pixel blue border,
|
||||
with an extra 1-pixel border in the window client background colour (usually white) to
|
||||
separate the client area's scrollbars from the border.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
If you don't specify a border style for a wxTextCtrl in rich edit mode, wxWidgets now gives
|
||||
the control themed borders automatically, where previously they would take the Windows 95-style
|
||||
sunken border. Other native controls such as wxTextCtrl in non-rich edit mode, and wxComboBox,
|
||||
already paint themed borders where appropriate. To use themed borders on other windows, such
|
||||
as wxPanel, pass the wxBORDER_THEME style, or (apart from wxPanel) pass no border style.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
In general, specifying wxBORDER_THEME will cause a border of some kind to be used, chosen by the platform
|
||||
and control class. To leave the border decision entirely to wxWidgets, pass wxBORDER_DEFAULT.
|
||||
This is not to be confused with specifying wxBORDER_NONE, which says that there should
|
||||
definitely be @e no border.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsubsection page_port_wxmsw_themedborders_details More detail on border implementation
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The way that wxMSW decides whether to apply a themed border is as follows.
|
||||
The theming code calls wxWindow::GetBorder() to obtain a border. If no border style has been
|
||||
passed to the window constructor, GetBorder() calls GetDefaultBorder() for this window.
|
||||
If wxBORDER_THEME was passed to the window constructor, GetBorder() calls GetDefaultBorderForControl().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The implementation of wxWindow::GetDefaultBorder() on wxMSW calls wxWindow::CanApplyThemeBorder()
|
||||
which is a virtual function that tells wxWidgets whether a control can have a theme
|
||||
applied explicitly (some native controls already paint a theme in which case we should not
|
||||
@ -210,47 +210,47 @@
|
||||
we wish to create a window with no border (for example, notebook pages). So wxPanel
|
||||
overrides GetDefaultBorder() in order to call the generic wxWindowBase::GetDefaultBorder(),
|
||||
returning wxBORDER_NONE.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_port_wxmsw_wince wxWinCE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxWinCE is the name given to wxMSW when compiled on Windows CE devices;
|
||||
most of wxMSW is common to Win32 and Windows CE but there are
|
||||
some simplifications, enhancements, and differences in
|
||||
behaviour.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
For building instructions, see docs/msw/wince in the
|
||||
distribution, also the section about Visual Studio 2005 project
|
||||
files below. The rest of this section documents issues you
|
||||
need to be aware of when programming for Windows CE devices.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsubsection page_port_wxmsw_wince_ General issues for wxWinCE programming
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Mobile applications generally have fewer features and
|
||||
simpler user interfaces. Simply omit whole sizers, static
|
||||
lines and controls in your dialogs, and use comboboxes instead
|
||||
of listboxes where appropriate. You also need to reduce
|
||||
the amount of spacing used by sizers, for which you can
|
||||
use a macro such as this:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@verbatim
|
||||
#if defined(__WXWINCE__)
|
||||
#define wxLARGESMALL(large,small) small
|
||||
#else
|
||||
#define wxLARGESMALL(large,small) large
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
// Usage
|
||||
topsizer->Add( CreateTextSizer( message ), 0, wxALL, wxLARGESMALL(10,0) );
|
||||
@endverbatim
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
There is only ever one instance of a Windows CE application running,
|
||||
and wxWidgets will take care of showing the current instance and
|
||||
shutting down the second instance if necessary.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
You can test the return value of wxSystemSettings::GetScreenType()
|
||||
for a qualitative assessment of what kind of display is available,
|
||||
or use wxGetDisplaySize() if you need more information.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
You can also use wxGetOsVersion to test for a version of Windows CE at
|
||||
run-time (see the next section). However, because different builds
|
||||
are currently required to target different kinds of device, these
|
||||
@ -259,19 +259,19 @@
|
||||
platforms. This would require a different approach to the way
|
||||
wxWidgets adapts its behaviour (such as for menubars) to suit the
|
||||
style of device.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
See the "Life!" example (demos/life) for an example of
|
||||
an application that has been tailored for PocketPC and Smartphone use.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@note don't forget to have this line in your .rc file, as for
|
||||
desktop Windows applications:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@verbatim #include "wx/msw/wx.rc" @endverbatim
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsubsection page_port_wxmsw_wince_sdk Testing for WinCE SDKs
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Use these preprocessor symbols to test for the different types of device or SDK:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@li @b __SMARTPHONE__ Generic mobile devices with phone buttons and a small display
|
||||
@li @b __PDA__ Generic mobile devices with no phone
|
||||
@li @b __HANDHELDPC__ Generic mobile device with a keyboard
|
||||
@ -280,58 +280,58 @@
|
||||
@li @b __POCKETPC__ Microsoft-powered PocketPC devices with touch-screen
|
||||
@li @b __WINCE_STANDARDSDK__ Microsoft-powered Windows CE devices, for generic Windows CE applications
|
||||
@li @b __WINCE_NET__ Microsoft-powered Windows CE .NET devices (_WIN32_WCE is 400 or greater)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxGetOsVersion will return these values:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@li @b wxWINDOWS_POCKETPC The application is running under PocketPC.
|
||||
@li @b wxWINDOWS_SMARTPHONE The application is running under Smartphone.
|
||||
@li @b wxWINDOWS_CE The application is running under Windows CE (built with the Standard SDK).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsubsection page_port_wxmsw_wince_sizing Window sizing in wxWinCE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Top level windows (dialogs, frames) are created always full-screen. Fit() of sizers will not rescale top
|
||||
level windows but instead will scale window content.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
If the screen orientation changes, the windows will automatically be resized
|
||||
so no further action needs to be taken (unless you want to change the layout
|
||||
according to the orientation, which you could detect in idle time, for example).
|
||||
When input panel (SIP) is shown, top level windows (frames and dialogs) resize
|
||||
accordingly (see wxTopLevelWindow::HandleSettingChange).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsubsection page_port_wxmsw_wince_toplevel Closing top-level windows in wxWinCE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
You won't get a wxCloseEvent when the user clicks on the X in the titlebar
|
||||
on Smartphone and PocketPC; the window is simply hidden instead. However the system may send the
|
||||
event to force the application to close down.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsubsection page_port_wxmsw_wince_hibernation Hibernation in wxWinCE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Smartphone and PocketPC will send a wxEVT_HIBERNATE to the application object in low
|
||||
memory conditions. Your application should release memory and close dialogs,
|
||||
and wake up again when the next wxEVT_ACTIVATE or wxEVT_ACTIVATE_APP message is received.
|
||||
(wxEVT_ACTIVATE_APP is generated whenever a wxEVT_ACTIVATE event is received
|
||||
in Smartphone and PocketPC, since these platforms do not support WM_ACTIVATEAPP.)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsubsection page_port_wxmsw_wince_hwbutt Hardware buttons in wxWinCE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Special hardware buttons are sent to a window via the wxEVT_HOTKEY event
|
||||
under Smartphone and PocketPC. You should first register each required button with
|
||||
under Smartphone and PocketPC. You should first register each required button with
|
||||
wxWindow::RegisterHotKey, and unregister the button when you're done with it. For example:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@verbatim
|
||||
win->RegisterHotKey(0, wxMOD_WIN, WXK_SPECIAL1);
|
||||
win->UnregisterHotKey(0);
|
||||
@endverbatim
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
You may have to register the buttons in a wxEVT_ACTIVATE event handler
|
||||
since other applications will grab the buttons.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
There is currently no method of finding out the names of the special
|
||||
buttons or how many there are.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsubsection page_port_wxmsw_wince_dialogs Dialogs in wxWinCE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
PocketPC dialogs have an OK button on the caption, and so you should generally
|
||||
not repeat an OK button on the dialog. You can add a Cancel button if necessary, but some dialogs
|
||||
simply don't offer you the choice (the guidelines recommend you offer an Undo facility
|
||||
@ -339,11 +339,11 @@
|
||||
a wxID_OK event by default. If you wish to change this, call wxDialog::SetAffirmativeId
|
||||
with the required identifier to be used. Or, override wxDialog::DoOK (return @false to
|
||||
have wxWidgets simply call Close to dismiss the dialog).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Smartphone dialogs do @e not have an OK button on the caption, and are closed
|
||||
using one of the two menu buttons. You need to assign these using wxTopLevelWindow::SetLeftMenu
|
||||
and wxTopLevelWindow::SetRightMenu, for example:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@verbatim
|
||||
#ifdef __SMARTPHONE__
|
||||
SetLeftMenu(wxID_OK);
|
||||
@ -354,30 +354,30 @@
|
||||
topsizer->Add( CreateButtonSizer( wxOK|wxCANCEL ), 0, wxEXPAND | wxALL, 10 );
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
@endverbatim
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
For implementing property sheets (flat tabs), use a wxNotebook with wxNB_FLAT|wxNB_BOTTOM
|
||||
and have the notebook left, top and right sides overlap the dialog by about 3 pixels
|
||||
to eliminate spurious borders. You can do this by using a negative spacing in your
|
||||
sizer Add() call. The cross-platform property sheet dialog wxPropertySheetDialog is
|
||||
provided, to show settings in the correct style on PocketPC and on other platforms.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Notifications (bubble HTML text with optional buttons and links) will also be
|
||||
implemented in the future for PocketPC.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Modeless dialogs probably don't make sense for PocketPC and Smartphone, since
|
||||
frames and dialogs are normally full-screen, and a modeless dialog is normally
|
||||
intended to co-exist with the main application frame.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsubsection page_port_wxmsw_wince_ppc Menubars and toolbars in PocketPC
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
On PocketPC, a frame must always have a menubar, even if it's empty.
|
||||
An empty menubar/toolbar is automatically provided for dialogs, to hide
|
||||
any existing menubar for the duration of the dialog.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Menubars and toolbars are implemented using a combined control,
|
||||
but you can use essentially the usual wxWidgets API; wxWidgets will combine the menubar
|
||||
and toolbar. However, there are some restrictions:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@li You must create the frame's primary toolbar with wxFrame::CreateToolBar,
|
||||
because this uses the special wxToolMenuBar class (derived from wxToolBar)
|
||||
to implement the combined toolbar and menubar. Otherwise, you can create and manage toolbars
|
||||
@ -391,20 +391,20 @@
|
||||
or with transparency (for example, using XPMs).
|
||||
@li Adding controls to wxToolMenuBar is not supported. However, wxToolBar supports
|
||||
controls.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Unlike in all other ports, a wxDialog has a wxToolBar, automatically created
|
||||
for you. You may either leave it blank, or access it with wxDialog::GetToolBar
|
||||
and add buttons, then calling wxToolBar::Realize. You cannot set or recreate
|
||||
the toolbar.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsubsection page_port_wxmsw_wince_smart Menubars and toolbars in Smartphone
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
On Smartphone, there are only two menu buttons, so a menubar is simulated
|
||||
using a nested menu on the right menu button. Any toolbars are simply ignored on
|
||||
Smartphone.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsubsection page_port_wxmsw_wince_closing Closing windows in wxWinCE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The guidelines state that applications should not have a Quit menu item,
|
||||
since the user should not have to know whether an application is in memory
|
||||
or not. The close button on a window does not call the window's
|
||||
@ -412,141 +412,141 @@
|
||||
the Ctrl+Q accelerator can be used to quit the application, so wxWidgets
|
||||
defines this accelerator by default and if your application handles
|
||||
wxID_EXIT, it will do the right thing.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsubsection page_port_wxmsw_wince_ctx Context menus in wxWinCE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
To enable context menus in PocketPC, you currently need to call wxWindow::EnableContextMenu,
|
||||
a wxWinCE-only function. Otherwise the context menu event (wxContextMenuEvent) will
|
||||
never be sent. This API is subject to change.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Context menus are not supported in Smartphone.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsubsection page_port_wxmsw_wince_ctrl Control differences on wxWinCE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
These controls and styles are specific to wxWinCE:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@li wxTextCtrl The wxTE_CAPITALIZE style causes a CAPEDIT control to
|
||||
be created, which capitalizes the first letter.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
These controls are missing from wxWinCE:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@li MDI classes MDI is not supported under Windows CE.
|
||||
@li wxMiniFrame Not supported under Windows CE.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Tooltips are not currently supported for controls, since on PocketPC controls with
|
||||
tooltips are distinct controls, and it will be hard to add dynamic
|
||||
tooltip support.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Control borders on PocketPC and Smartphone should normally be specified with
|
||||
wxBORDER_SIMPLE instead of wxBORDER_SUNKEN. Controls will usually adapt
|
||||
appropriately by virtue of their GetDefaultBorder() function, but if you
|
||||
wish to specify a style explicitly you can use wxDEFAULT_CONTROL_BORDER
|
||||
which will give a simple border on PocketPC and Smartphone, and the sunken border on
|
||||
other platforms.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsubsection page_port_wxmsw_wince_help Online help in wxWinCE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
You can use the help controller wxWinceHelpController which controls
|
||||
simple @c .htm files, usually installed in the Windows directory.
|
||||
See the Windows CE reference for how to format the HTML files.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsubsection page_port_wxmsw_wince_install Installing your PocketPC and Smartphone applications
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
To install your application, you need to build a CAB file using
|
||||
the parameters defined in a special .inf file. The CabWiz program
|
||||
in your SDK will compile the CAB file from the .inf file and
|
||||
files that it specifies.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
For delivery, you can simply ask the user to copy the CAB file to the
|
||||
device and execute the CAB file using File Explorer. Or, you can
|
||||
write a program for the desktop PC that will find the ActiveSync
|
||||
Application Manager and install the CAB file on the device,
|
||||
which is obviously much easier for the user.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Here are some links that may help.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@li A setup builder that takes CABs and builds a setup program is at
|
||||
http://www.eskimo.com/~scottlu/win/index.html.
|
||||
@li Sample installation files can be found in
|
||||
@li Sample installation files can be found in
|
||||
<tt>Windows CE Tools/wce420/POCKET PC 2003/Samples/Win32/AppInst</tt>.
|
||||
@li An installer generator using wxPython can be found at
|
||||
@li An installer generator using wxPython can be found at
|
||||
http://ppcquicksoft.iespana.es/ppcquicksoft/myinstall.html.
|
||||
@li Miscellaneous Windows CE resources can be found at
|
||||
@li Miscellaneous Windows CE resources can be found at
|
||||
http://www.orbworks.com/pcce/resources.html.
|
||||
@li Installer creation instructions with a setup.exe for installing to PPC can be found at
|
||||
@li Installer creation instructions with a setup.exe for installing to PPC can be found at
|
||||
http://www.pocketpcdn.com/articles/creatingsetup.html.
|
||||
@li Microsoft instructions are at
|
||||
@li Microsoft instructions are at
|
||||
http://msdn.microsoft.com/library/default.asp?url=/library/en-us/dnce30/html/appinstall30.asp?frame=true
|
||||
@li Troubleshooting WinCE application installations:
|
||||
@li Troubleshooting WinCE application installations:
|
||||
http://support.microsoft.com/default.aspx?scid=KB;en-us;q181007
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
You may also check out <tt>demos/life/setup/wince</tt> which contains
|
||||
scripts to create a PocketPC installation for ARM-based
|
||||
devices. In particular, @c build.bat builds the distribution and
|
||||
copies it to a directory called @c Deliver.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsubsection page_port_wxmsw_wince_filedlg wxFileDialog in PocketPC
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Allowing the user to access files on memory cards, or on arbitrary
|
||||
parts of the filesystem, is a pain; the standard file dialog only
|
||||
shows folders under My Documents or folders on memory cards
|
||||
(not the system or card root directory, for example). This is
|
||||
a known problem for PocketPC developers.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
If you need a file dialog that allows access to all folders,
|
||||
you can use wxGenericFileDialog instead. You will need to include
|
||||
you can use wxGenericFileDialog instead. You will need to include
|
||||
@c wx/generic/filedlgg.h.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsubsection page_port_wxmsw_wince_evc Embedded Visual C++ Issues
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<b>Run-time type information</b>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
If you wish to use runtime type information (RTTI) with eVC++ 4, you need to download
|
||||
an extra library, @c ccrtrtti.lib, and link with it. At the time of
|
||||
writing you can get it from here:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@verbatim
|
||||
http://support.microsoft.com/kb/830482/en-us
|
||||
@endverbatim
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Otherwise you will get linker errors similar to this:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@verbatim
|
||||
wxwince26d.lib(control.obj) : error LNK2001: unresolved external symbol "const type_info::`vftable'" (??_7type_info@@6B@)
|
||||
@endverbatim
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<b>Windows Mobile 5.0 emulator</b>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Note that there is no separate emulator configuration for Windows Mobile 5.0: the
|
||||
emulator runs the ARM code directly.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<b>Visual Studio 2005 project files</b>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Unfortunately, Visual Studio 2005, required to build Windows Mobile 5.0 applications,
|
||||
doesn't do a perfect job of converting the project files from eVC++ format.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
When you have converted the wxWidgets workspace, edit the configuration properties
|
||||
for each configuration and in the Librarian, add a relative path ..\\..\\lib to
|
||||
each library path. For example:
|
||||
each library path. For example:
|
||||
<tt>..\\$(PlatformName)\\$(ConfigurationName)\\wx_mono.lib</tt>.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Then, for a sample you want to compile, edit the configuration properties
|
||||
and make sure
|
||||
<tt>..\\..\\lib\\$(PlatformName)\\$(ConfigurationName)</tt>
|
||||
is in the Linker/General/Additional Library Directories property.
|
||||
Also change the Linker/Input/Additional Dependencies property to something like
|
||||
<tt>coredll.lib wx_mono.lib wx_wxjpeg.lib wx_wxpng.lib wx_wxzlib.lib wx_wxexpat.lib
|
||||
and make sure
|
||||
<tt>..\\..\\lib\\$(PlatformName)\\$(ConfigurationName)</tt>
|
||||
is in the Linker/General/Additional Library Directories property.
|
||||
Also change the Linker/Input/Additional Dependencies property to something like
|
||||
<tt>coredll.lib wx_mono.lib wx_wxjpeg.lib wx_wxpng.lib wx_wxzlib.lib wx_wxexpat.lib
|
||||
commctrl.lib winsock.lib wininet.lib</tt>
|
||||
(since the library names in the wxWidgets workspace were changed by VS 2005).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Alternately, you could could edit all the names to be identical to the original eVC++
|
||||
names, but this will probably be more fiddly.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsubsection page_port_wxmsw_wince_issues Remaining issues
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
These are some of the remaining problems to be sorted out, and features
|
||||
to be supported.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@li <b>Windows Mobile 5 issues.</b> It is not possible to get the HMENU for
|
||||
the command bar on Mobile 5, so the menubar functions need to be rewritten
|
||||
to get the individual menus without use of a menubar handle. Also the
|
||||
@ -567,15 +567,15 @@
|
||||
missing styles are implemented with WM_PAINT.
|
||||
@li <b>HTML control.</b> PocketPC has its own HTML control which can be used for showing
|
||||
local pages or navigating the web. We should create a version of wxHtmlWindow that uses this
|
||||
control, or have a separately-named control (wxHtmlCtrl), with a syntax as close as possible
|
||||
control, or have a separately-named control (wxHtmlCtrl), with a syntax as close as possible
|
||||
to wxHtmlWindow.
|
||||
@li <b>Tooltip control.</b> PocketPC uses special TTBUTTON and TTSTATIC controls for adding
|
||||
tooltips, with the tooltip separated from the label with a double tilde. We need to support
|
||||
this using SetToolTip.(Unfortunately it does not seem possible to dynamically remove the tooltip,
|
||||
tooltips, with the tooltip separated from the label with a double tilde. We need to support
|
||||
this using SetToolTip.(Unfortunately it does not seem possible to dynamically remove the tooltip,
|
||||
so an extra style may be required.)
|
||||
@li <b>Focus.</b> In the wxPropertySheetDialog demo on Smartphone, it's not possible to navigate
|
||||
between controls. The focus handling in wxWidgets needs investigation. See in particular
|
||||
src/common/containr.cpp, and note that the default OnActivate handler in src/msw/toplevel.cpp
|
||||
between controls. The focus handling in wxWidgets needs investigation. See in particular
|
||||
src/common/containr.cpp, and note that the default OnActivate handler in src/msw/toplevel.cpp
|
||||
sets the focus to the first child of the dialog.
|
||||
@li <b>OK button.</b> We should allow the OK button on a dialog to be optional, perhaps
|
||||
by using wxCLOSE_BOX to indicate when the OK button should be displayed.
|
||||
|
@ -117,7 +117,7 @@
|
||||
specific information about the problem will be logged.
|
||||
|
||||
You should also use @ref page_macro_cat_debugging as part of a `defensive programming' strategy,
|
||||
scattering wxASSERTs liberally to test for problems in your code as early as possible.
|
||||
scattering wxASSERTs liberally to test for problems in your code as early as possible.
|
||||
Forward thinking will save a surprising amount of time in the long run.
|
||||
|
||||
See the @ref overview_debugging for further information.
|
||||
|
@ -36,10 +36,10 @@
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_utils_tex2rtf Tex2RTF
|
||||
|
||||
Supplied with wxWidgets is a utility called Tex2RTF for
|
||||
Supplied with wxWidgets is a utility called Tex2RTF for
|
||||
converting @e LaTeX manuals HTML, MS HTML Help, wxHTML Help, RTF, and Windows
|
||||
Help RTF formats. Tex2RTF was used for the wxWidgets manuals and can be used
|
||||
independently by authors wishing to create on-line and printed manuals from the
|
||||
Help RTF formats. Tex2RTF was used for the wxWidgets manuals and can be used
|
||||
independently by authors wishing to create on-line and printed manuals from the
|
||||
same @e LaTeX source. Please see the separate documentation for Tex2RTF.
|
||||
You can find it under @c utils/tex2rtf.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -60,7 +60,7 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@section page_utils_samples Samples
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Probably the best way to learn wxWidgets is by reading the source of some 50+
|
||||
samples provided with it. Many aspects of wxWidgets programming can be learnt
|
||||
from them, but sometimes it is not simple to just choose the right sample to
|
||||
@ -68,82 +68,82 @@
|
||||
make it easier to find the relevant one if a simple grep through all sources
|
||||
didn't help. They also provide some notes about using the samples and what
|
||||
features of wxWidgets are they supposed to test.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
There are currently more than 50 different samples as part of wxWidgets and
|
||||
this list is not complete. You should start your tour of wxWidgets with the
|
||||
minimal sample which is the wxWidgets version of
|
||||
"Hello, world!". It shows the basic structure of wxWidgets program and is the
|
||||
most commented sample of all - looking at its source code is recommended.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The next most useful samples are probably widgets
|
||||
and controls which show many of wxWidgets native and
|
||||
generic controls, such as buttons, listboxes, checkboxes, comboboxes etc.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Other, more complicated controls, have their own samples. In this category you
|
||||
may find the following samples showing the corresponding controls:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@li wxCalendarCtrl: @ref page_utils_samples_calendar
|
||||
@li wxListCtrl: @ref page_utils_samples_listctrl
|
||||
@li wxTreeCtrl: @ref page_utils_samples_treectrl
|
||||
@li wxGrid: @ref page_utils_samples_grid
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Finally, it might be helpful to do a search in the entire sample directory if
|
||||
you can't find the sample showing the control you are interested in by
|
||||
name. Most classes contained in wxWidgets occur in at least one of the samples.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_minimal Minimal sample
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The minimal sample is what most people will know under the term Hello World,
|
||||
i.e. a minimal program that doesn't demonstrate anything apart from what is
|
||||
needed to write a program that will display a "hello" dialog. This is usually
|
||||
a good starting point for learning how to use wxWidgets.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_animate Animate sample
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The @c animate sample shows how you can use wxAnimationCtrl
|
||||
control and shows concept of a platform-dependent animation encapsulated
|
||||
in wxAnimation.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_artprovider Art provider sample
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The @c artprov sample shows how you can customize the look of standard
|
||||
wxWidgets dialogs by replacing default bitmaps/icons with your own versions.
|
||||
It also shows how you can use wxArtProvider to
|
||||
get stock bitmaps for use in your application.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_calendar Calendar sample
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
This font shows the calendar control in action. It
|
||||
shows how to configure the control (see the different options in the calendar
|
||||
menu) and also how to process the notifications from it.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_config Config sample
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
This sample demonstrates the wxConfig classes in a platform
|
||||
independent way, i.e. it uses text based files to store a given configuration under
|
||||
Unix and uses the Registry under Windows.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
See @ref overview_config for the descriptions of all features of this class.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_controls Controls sample
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The controls sample is the main test program for most simple controls used in
|
||||
wxWidgets. The sample tests their basic functionality, events, placement,
|
||||
modification in terms of colour and font as well as the possibility to change
|
||||
the controls programmatically, such as adding an item to a list box etc. Apart
|
||||
from that, the sample uses a wxNotebook and tests most
|
||||
features of this special control (using bitmap in the tabs, using
|
||||
wxSizer instances and wxLayoutConstraints within notebook pages, advancing pages
|
||||
wxSizer instances and wxLayoutConstraints within notebook pages, advancing pages
|
||||
programmatically and vetoing a page change by intercepting the wxNotebookEvent.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The various controls tested are listed here:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@li wxButton
|
||||
@li wxBitmapButton
|
||||
@li wxCheckBox
|
||||
@ -159,10 +159,10 @@
|
||||
@li wxRadioBox
|
||||
@li wxRadioButton
|
||||
@li wxSlider
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_debugrpt DebugRpt sample
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
This sample shows how to use wxDebugReport class to
|
||||
generate a debug report in case of a program crash or otherwise. On start up,
|
||||
it proposes to either crash itself (by dereferencing a NULL pointer) or
|
||||
@ -170,54 +170,54 @@
|
||||
with standard information adding a custom file to it (just a timestamp) and
|
||||
allows to view the information gathered using
|
||||
wxDebugReportPreview.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
For the report processing part of the sample to work you should make available
|
||||
a Web server accepting form uploads, otherwise
|
||||
wxDebugReportUpload will report an error.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_dialogs Dialogs sample
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
This sample shows how to use the common dialogs available from wxWidgets. These
|
||||
dialogs are described in detail in the @ref overview_cmndlg.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_dialup Dialup sample
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
This sample shows the wxDialUpManager
|
||||
class. In the status bar, it displays the information gathered through its
|
||||
interface: in particular, the current connection status (online or offline) and
|
||||
whether the connection is permanent (in which case a string `LAN' appears in
|
||||
the third status bar field - but note that you may be on a LAN not
|
||||
connected to the Internet, in which case you will not see this) or not.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Using the menu entries, you may also dial or hang up the line if you have a
|
||||
modem attached and (this only makes sense for Windows) list the available
|
||||
connections.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_dnd DnD sample
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
This sample shows both clipboard and drag and drop in action. It is quite non
|
||||
trivial and may be safely used as a basis for implementing the clipboard and
|
||||
drag and drop operations in a real-life program.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
When you run the sample, its screen is split in several parts. On the top,
|
||||
there are two listboxes which show the standard derivations of
|
||||
wxDropTarget:
|
||||
wxTextDropTarget and
|
||||
wxFileDropTarget.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The middle of the sample window is taken by the log window which shows what is
|
||||
going on (of course, this only works in debug builds) and may be helpful to see
|
||||
the sequence of steps of data transfer.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Finally, the last part is used for dragging text from it to either one of the
|
||||
listboxes (only one will accept it) or another application. The last
|
||||
functionality available from the main frame is to paste a bitmap from the
|
||||
clipboard (or, in the case of the Windows version, also a metafile) - it will be
|
||||
shown in a new frame.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
So far, everything we mentioned was implemented with minimal amount of code
|
||||
using standard wxWidgets classes. The more advanced features are demonstrated
|
||||
if you create a shape frame from the main frame menu. A shape is a geometric
|
||||
@ -230,93 +230,93 @@
|
||||
bitmaps which allows them to be pasted/dropped in many other applications
|
||||
(and, under Windows, also as metafiles which are supported by most of Windows
|
||||
programs as well - try Write/Wordpad, for example).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Take a look at DnDShapeDataObject class to see how you may use
|
||||
wxDataObject to achieve this.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_event Event sample
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The event sample demonstrates various features of the wxWidgets events. It
|
||||
shows using dynamic events and connecting/disconnecting the event handlers
|
||||
during run time and also using
|
||||
PushEventHandler() and
|
||||
PopEventHandler().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_except Except(ions) sample
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
This very simple sample shows how to use C++ exceptions in wxWidgets programs,
|
||||
i.e. where to catch the exception which may be thrown by the program code. It
|
||||
doesn't do anything very exciting by itself, you need to study its code to
|
||||
understand what goes on.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
You need to build the library with @c wxUSE_EXCEPTIONS being set to @c 1
|
||||
and compile your code with C++ exceptions support to be able to build this
|
||||
sample.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_exec Exec sample
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The exec sample demonstrates the wxExecute and
|
||||
wxShell functions. Both of them are used to execute the
|
||||
external programs and the sample shows how to do this synchronously (waiting
|
||||
until the program terminates) or asynchronously (notification will come later).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
It also shows how to capture the output of the child process in both
|
||||
synchronous and asynchronous cases and how to kill the processes with
|
||||
wxProcess::Kill and test for their existence with
|
||||
wxProcess::Exists.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_font Font sample
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The font sample demonstrates wxFont,
|
||||
wxFontEnumerator and
|
||||
wxFontMapper classes. It allows you to see the fonts
|
||||
available (to wxWidgets) on the computer and shows all characters of the
|
||||
chosen font as well.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_grid Grid sample
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
TODO.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_html HTML samples
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Eight HTML samples (you can find them in directory @c samples/html)
|
||||
cover all features of the HTML sub-library.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@li @b Test demonstrates how to create wxHtmlWindow
|
||||
and also shows most supported HTML tags.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@li @b Widget shows how you can embed ordinary controls or windows within an
|
||||
HTML page. It also nicely explains how to write new tag handlers and extend
|
||||
the library to work with unsupported tags.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@li @b About may give you an idea how to write good-looking About boxes.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@li @b Zip demonstrates use of virtual file systems in wxHTML. The zip archives
|
||||
handler (ships with wxWidgets) allows you to access HTML pages stored
|
||||
in a compressed archive as if they were ordinary files.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@li @b Virtual is yet another virtual file systems demo. This one generates pages at run-time.
|
||||
You may find it useful if you need to display some reports in your application.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@li @b Printing explains use of wxHtmlEasyPrinting
|
||||
class which serves as as-simple-as-possible interface for printing HTML
|
||||
documents without much work. In fact, only few function calls are sufficient.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@li @b Help and @b Helpview are variations on displaying HTML help
|
||||
(compatible with MS HTML Help Workshop). @e Help shows how to embed
|
||||
wxHtmlHelpController in your application
|
||||
while @e Helpview is a simple tool that only pops up the help window and
|
||||
displays help books given at command line.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_image Image sample
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The image sample demonstrates use of the wxImage class
|
||||
and shows how to download images in a variety of formats, currently PNG, GIF,
|
||||
TIFF, JPEG, BMP, PNM and PCX. The top of the sample shows two rectangles, one
|
||||
@ -324,7 +324,7 @@
|
||||
wxBitmap, converted to a wxImage, saved as a PNG image
|
||||
and then reloaded from the PNG file again so that conversions between wxImage
|
||||
and wxBitmap as well as loading and saving PNG files are tested.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
At the bottom of the main frame there is a test for using a monochrome bitmap by
|
||||
drawing into a wxMemoryDC. The bitmap is then drawn
|
||||
specifying the foreground and background colours with
|
||||
@ -332,25 +332,25 @@
|
||||
wxDC::SetTextBackground (on the left). The
|
||||
bitmap is then converted to a wxImage and the foreground colour (black) is
|
||||
replaced with red using wxImage::Replace.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
This sample also contains the code for testing the image rotation and resizing
|
||||
and using raw bitmap access, see the corresponding menu commands.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_internat Internat(ionalization) sample
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The not very clearly named internat sample demonstrates the wxWidgets
|
||||
internationalization (i18n for short from now on) features. To be more
|
||||
precise, it only shows localization support, i.e. support for translating the
|
||||
program messages into another language while true i18n would also involve
|
||||
changing the other aspects of the programs behaviour.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
More information about this sample can be found in the @c readme.txt file in
|
||||
its directory. Please also see the @ref overview_i18n.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_layout Layout sample
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The layout sample demonstrates the two different layout systems offered
|
||||
by wxWidgets. When starting the program, you will see a frame with some
|
||||
controls and some graphics. The controls will change their size whenever
|
||||
@ -359,70 +359,70 @@
|
||||
class. See also the overview and the
|
||||
wxIndividualLayoutConstraint
|
||||
class for further information.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The menu in this sample offers two more tests, one showing how to use
|
||||
a wxBoxSizer in a simple dialog and the other one
|
||||
showing how to use sizers in connection with a wxNotebook
|
||||
class. See also wxSizer.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_listctrl Listctrl sample
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
This sample shows the wxListCtrl control. Different modes
|
||||
supported by the control (list, icons, small icons, report) may be chosen from
|
||||
the menu.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The sample also provides some timings for adding/deleting/sorting a lot of
|
||||
(several thousands) items into the control.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_mediaplayer Mediaplayer sample
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
This sample demonstrates how to use all the features of
|
||||
wxMediaCtrl and play various types of sound, video,
|
||||
and other files.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
It replaces the old dynamic sample.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_notebook Notebook sample
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
This samples shows wxBookCtrl family of controls.
|
||||
Although initially it was written to demonstrate wxNotebook
|
||||
only, it can now be also used to see wxListbook,
|
||||
wxChoicebook and wxTreebook in action.
|
||||
Test each of the controls, their orientation, images and pages using
|
||||
Test each of the controls, their orientation, images and pages using
|
||||
commands through menu.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_render Render sample
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
This sample shows how to replace the default wxWidgets
|
||||
renderer and also how to write a shared library
|
||||
(DLL) implementing a renderer and load and unload it during the run-time.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_scrollsub Scroll subwindow sample
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
This sample demonstrates use of the wxScrolledWindow
|
||||
class including placing subwindows into it and drawing simple graphics. It uses the
|
||||
SetTargetWindow method and thus the effect
|
||||
of scrolling does not show in the scrolled window itself, but in one of its subwindows.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Additionally, this samples demonstrates how to optimize drawing operations in wxWidgets,
|
||||
in particular using the wxWindow::IsExposed method with
|
||||
the aim to prevent unnecessary drawing in the window and thus reducing or removing
|
||||
flicker on screen.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_sockets Sockets sample
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The sockets sample demonstrates how to use the communication facilities
|
||||
provided by wxSocket. There are two different
|
||||
applications in this sample: a server, which is implemented using a
|
||||
wxSocketServer object, and a client, which
|
||||
is implemented as a wxSocketClient.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The server binds to the local address, using TCP port number 3000,
|
||||
sets up an event handler to be notified of incoming connection requests
|
||||
(@b wxSOCKET_CONNECTION events), and sits there, waiting for clients
|
||||
@ -435,13 +435,13 @@
|
||||
handler is the same for all connections; to find out which socket the
|
||||
event is addressed to, the GetSocket function
|
||||
is used.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Although it might take some time to get used to the event-oriented
|
||||
system upon which wxSocket is built, the benefits are many. See, for
|
||||
example, that the server application, while being single-threaded
|
||||
(and of course without using fork() or ugly select() loops) can handle
|
||||
an arbitrary number of connections.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The client starts up unconnected, so you can use the Connect... option
|
||||
to specify the address of the server you are going to connect to (the
|
||||
TCP port number is hard-coded as 3000). Once connected, a number of
|
||||
@ -454,70 +454,70 @@
|
||||
both clients and connection objects in the server set up an event handler
|
||||
to catch @b wxSOCKET_LOST events, each one is immediately notified
|
||||
if the other end closes the connection.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
There is also a URL test which shows how to use
|
||||
the wxURL class to fetch data from a given URL.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The sockets sample is work in progress. Some things to do:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@li More tests for basic socket functionality.
|
||||
@li More tests for protocol classes (wxProtocol and its descendants).
|
||||
@li Tests for the recently added (and still in alpha stage) datagram sockets.
|
||||
@li New samples which actually do something useful (suggestions accepted).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_sound Sound sample
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The @c sound sample shows how to use wxSound for simple
|
||||
audio output (e.g. notifications).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_statbar Statbar sample
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
This sample shows how to create and use wxStatusBar. Although most of the
|
||||
samples have a statusbar, they usually only create a default one and only
|
||||
do it once.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Here you can see how to recreate the statusbar (with possibly different number
|
||||
of fields) and how to use it to show icons/bitmaps and/or put arbitrary
|
||||
controls into it.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_taborder Tab order sample
|
||||
|
||||
This sample allows to test keyboard navigation (mostly done using the
|
||||
|
||||
This sample allows to test keyboard navigation (mostly done using the
|
||||
@c TAB key, hence the sample name) between different controls.
|
||||
It shows the use of wxWindow::MoveBeforeInTabOrder() and
|
||||
It shows the use of wxWindow::MoveBeforeInTabOrder() and
|
||||
MoveAfterInTabOrder() methods to change
|
||||
the default order of the windows in the navigation chain and of
|
||||
the default order of the windows in the navigation chain and of
|
||||
wxWindow::Navigate() for moving focus along this
|
||||
chain.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_text Text sample
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
This sample demonstrates four features: firstly the use and many variants of
|
||||
the wxTextCtrl class (single line, multi line, read only,
|
||||
password, ignoring TAB, ignoring ENTER).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Secondly it shows how to intercept a wxKeyEvent in both
|
||||
the raw form using the @c EVT_KEY_UP and @c EVT_KEY_DOWN macros and the
|
||||
higher level from using the @c EVT_CHAR macro. All characters will be logged
|
||||
in a log window at the bottom of the main window. By pressing some of the function
|
||||
keys, you can test some actions in the text ctrl as well as get statistics on the
|
||||
text ctrls, which is useful for testing if these statistics actually are correct.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Thirdly, on platforms which support it, the sample will offer to copy text to the
|
||||
wxClipboard and to paste text from it. The GTK version will
|
||||
use the so called PRIMARY SELECTION, which is the pseudo clipboard under X and
|
||||
best known from pasting text to the XTerm program.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Last not least: some of the text controls have tooltips and the sample also shows
|
||||
how tooltips can be centrally disabled and their latency controlled.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_thread Thread sample
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
This sample demonstrates use of threads in connection with GUI programs.
|
||||
There are two fundamentally different ways to use threads in GUI programs and
|
||||
either way has to take care of the fact that the GUI library itself usually
|
||||
@ -527,22 +527,22 @@
|
||||
background. In order to make communication between the main thread and the
|
||||
worker threads possible, wxWidgets offers the wxPostEvent
|
||||
function and this sample makes use of this function.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The other way to use a so called Mutex (such as those offered in the wxMutex
|
||||
class) that prevent threads from accessing the GUI classes as long as any other
|
||||
thread accesses them. For this, wxWidgets has the wxMutexGuiEnter
|
||||
and wxMutexGuiLeave functions, both of which are
|
||||
used and tested in the sample as well.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
See also @ref overview_thread and wxThread.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_toolbar Toolbar sample
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The toolbar sample shows the wxToolBar class in action.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The following things are demonstrated:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@li Creating the toolbar using wxToolBar::AddTool and wxToolBar::AddControl: see
|
||||
MyApp::InitToolbar in the sample.
|
||||
@li Using @c EVT_UPDATE_UI handler for automatically enabling/disabling
|
||||
@ -550,46 +550,46 @@
|
||||
in MyFrame::OnUpdateCopyAndCut.
|
||||
@li Using wxToolBar::DeleteTool and wxToolBar::InsertTool to dynamically update the
|
||||
toolbar.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Some buttons in the main toolbar are check buttons, i.e. they stay checked when
|
||||
pressed. On the platforms which support it, the sample also adds a combobox
|
||||
to the toolbar showing how you can use arbitrary controls and not only buttons
|
||||
in it.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
If you toggle another toolbar in the sample (using @c Ctrl-A) you will also
|
||||
see the radio toolbar buttons in action: the first three buttons form a radio
|
||||
group, i.e. checking any of them automatically unchecks the previously
|
||||
checked one.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_treectrl Treectrl sample
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
This sample demonstrates using the wxTreeCtrl class. Here
|
||||
you may see how to process various notification messages sent by this control
|
||||
and also when they occur (by looking at the messages in the text control in
|
||||
the bottom part of the frame).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Adding, inserting and deleting items and branches from the tree as well as
|
||||
sorting (in default alphabetical order as well as in custom one) is
|
||||
demonstrated here as well - try the corresponding menu entries.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_widgets Widgets sample
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The widgets sample is the main presentation program for most simple and advanced
|
||||
native controls and complex generic widgets provided by wxWidgets.
|
||||
The sample tests their basic functionality, events, placement, modification
|
||||
in terms of colour and font as well as the possibility to change
|
||||
the controls programmatically, such as adding an item to a list box etc.
|
||||
All widgets are categorized for easy browsing.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_wizard Wizard sample
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
This sample shows the so-called wizard dialog (implemented using
|
||||
wxWizard and related classes). It shows almost all
|
||||
features supported:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@li Using bitmaps with the wizard and changing them depending on the page
|
||||
shown (notice that wxValidationPage in the sample has a different image from
|
||||
the other ones)
|
||||
|
@ -46,7 +46,7 @@
|
||||
|
||||
@section overview_dataobject_source The data provider (source) duties
|
||||
|
||||
The data provider is responsible for creating a wxDataObject containing the
|
||||
The data provider is responsible for creating a wxDataObject containing the
|
||||
data to be transferred. Then it should either pass it to the clipboard using
|
||||
wxClipboard::SetData function or to wxDropSource and call wxDropSource::DoDragDrop
|
||||
function.
|
||||
@ -69,12 +69,12 @@
|
||||
@section overview_dataobject_target The data receiver (target) duties
|
||||
|
||||
To receive (paste in usual terminology) data from the clipboard, you should
|
||||
create a wxDataObject derived class which supports the data formats you need
|
||||
create a wxDataObject derived class which supports the data formats you need
|
||||
and pass it as argument to wxClipboard::GetData. If it returns @false,
|
||||
no data in (any of) the supported format(s) is available. If it returns @true,
|
||||
the data has been successfully transferred to wxDataObject.
|
||||
|
||||
For drag and drop case, the wxDropTarget::OnData virtual function will be called
|
||||
For drag and drop case, the wxDropTarget::OnData virtual function will be called
|
||||
when a data object is dropped, from which the data itself may be requested by calling
|
||||
wxDropTarget::GetData method which fills the data object.
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -49,12 +49,12 @@
|
||||
|
||||
@section overview_datetime_classes All date/time classes at a glance
|
||||
|
||||
There are 3 main classes declared in @c wx/datetime.h: except wxDateTime itself
|
||||
There are 3 main classes declared in @c wx/datetime.h: except wxDateTime itself
|
||||
which represents an absolute moment in time, there are also two classes -
|
||||
wxTimeSpan and wxDateSpan - which represent the intervals of time.
|
||||
|
||||
There are also helper classes which are used together with wxDateTime:
|
||||
wxDateTimeHolidayAuthority which is used to determine whether a given date
|
||||
wxDateTimeHolidayAuthority which is used to determine whether a given date
|
||||
is a holiday or not and wxDateTimeWorkDays which is a derivation of this
|
||||
class for which (only) Saturdays and Sundays are the holidays. See more about
|
||||
these classes in the discussion of the holidays (see @ref overview_datetime_holidays).
|
||||
|
@ -11,16 +11,16 @@
|
||||
@page overview_dc Device Contexts
|
||||
|
||||
Classes: wxBufferedDC, wxBufferedPaintDC, wxDC, wxPostScriptDC,
|
||||
wxMetafileDC, wxMemoryDC, wxPrinterDC, wxScreenDC, wxClientDC,
|
||||
wxMetafileDC, wxMemoryDC, wxPrinterDC, wxScreenDC, wxClientDC,
|
||||
wxPaintDC, wxWindowDC.
|
||||
|
||||
A wxDC is a @e device context onto which graphics and text can be drawn.
|
||||
The device context is intended to represent a number of output devices in a
|
||||
The device context is intended to represent a number of output devices in a
|
||||
generic way, with the same API being used throughout.
|
||||
|
||||
Some device contexts are created temporarily in order to draw on a window.
|
||||
This is @true of wxScreenDC, wxClientDC, wxPaintDC, and wxWindowDC.
|
||||
The following describes the differences between these device contexts and
|
||||
The following describes the differences between these device contexts and
|
||||
when you should use them.
|
||||
|
||||
@li @b wxScreenDC. Use this to paint on the screen, as opposed to an individual window.
|
||||
|
@ -22,7 +22,7 @@
|
||||
@li @ref overview_debugging_dbgctx
|
||||
@li @ref overview_debugging_dbgmacros
|
||||
@li @ref overview_debugging_logging
|
||||
@li @ref overview_debugging_dbgctx2
|
||||
@li @ref overview_debugging_dbgctx2
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<hr>
|
||||
@ -31,7 +31,7 @@
|
||||
@section overview_debugging_dbgctx wxDebugContext
|
||||
|
||||
wxDebugContext is a class that never gets instantiated, but ties together
|
||||
various static functions and variables. It allows you to dump all objects to that stream,
|
||||
various static functions and variables. It allows you to dump all objects to that stream,
|
||||
write statistics about object allocation, and check memory for errors.
|
||||
|
||||
It is good practice to define a wxObject::Dump member function for each class you derive
|
||||
@ -47,9 +47,9 @@
|
||||
and compiler -- some systems don't allow all memory logging to be enabled). See the
|
||||
memcheck sample for example of usage.
|
||||
|
||||
For wxDebugContext to do its work, the @e new and @e delete operators for wxObject
|
||||
have been redefined to store extra information about dynamically allocated objects
|
||||
(but not statically declared objects).
|
||||
For wxDebugContext to do its work, the @e new and @e delete operators for wxObject
|
||||
have been redefined to store extra information about dynamically allocated objects
|
||||
(but not statically declared objects).
|
||||
|
||||
This slows down a debugging version of an application, but can
|
||||
find difficult-to-detect memory leaks (objects are not
|
||||
@ -64,7 +64,7 @@
|
||||
@endcode
|
||||
|
||||
All occurrences of 'new' in wxWidgets and your own application will use
|
||||
the overridden form of the operator with two extra arguments. This means that
|
||||
the overridden form of the operator with two extra arguments. This means that
|
||||
the debugging output (and error messages reporting memory problems) will tell you what
|
||||
file and on what line you allocated the object. Unfortunately not all
|
||||
compilers allow this definition to work properly, but most do.
|
||||
@ -98,7 +98,7 @@
|
||||
|
||||
@section overview_debugging_logging Logging functions
|
||||
|
||||
You can use the wxLogDebug and wxLogTrace functions to output debugging information in
|
||||
You can use the wxLogDebug and wxLogTrace functions to output debugging information in
|
||||
debug mode; it will do nothing for non-debugging code.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -37,29 +37,29 @@
|
||||
|
||||
@section overview_dialog_autoscrolling Automatic scrolling dialogs
|
||||
|
||||
As an ever greater variety of mobile hardware comes to market, it becomes more
|
||||
imperative for wxWidgets applications to adapt to these platforms without putting
|
||||
As an ever greater variety of mobile hardware comes to market, it becomes more
|
||||
imperative for wxWidgets applications to adapt to these platforms without putting
|
||||
too much burden on the programmer. One area where wxWidgets can help is in adapting
|
||||
dialogs for the lower resolution screens that inevitably accompany a smaller form factor.
|
||||
wxDialog therefore supplies a global wxDialogLayoutAdapter class that implements
|
||||
wxDialog therefore supplies a global wxDialogLayoutAdapter class that implements
|
||||
automatic scrolling adaptation for most sizer-based custom dialogs.
|
||||
|
||||
Many applications should therefore be able to adapt to small displays with little
|
||||
Many applications should therefore be able to adapt to small displays with little
|
||||
or no work, as far as dialogs are concerned.
|
||||
By default this adaptation is off. To switch scrolling adaptation on globally in
|
||||
By default this adaptation is off. To switch scrolling adaptation on globally in
|
||||
your application, call the static function wxDialog::EnableLayoutAdaptation passing @true.
|
||||
You can also adjust adaptation on a per-dialog basis by calling
|
||||
wxDialog::SetLayoutAdaptationMode with one of @c wxDIALOG_ADAPTATION_MODE_DEFAULT
|
||||
wxDialog::SetLayoutAdaptationMode with one of @c wxDIALOG_ADAPTATION_MODE_DEFAULT
|
||||
(use the global setting), @c wxDIALOG_ADAPTATION_MODE_ENABLED or @c wxDIALOG_ADAPTATION_MODE_DISABLED.
|
||||
|
||||
The last two modes override the global adaptation setting.
|
||||
With adaptation enabled, if the display size is too small for the dialog, wxWidgets (or rather the
|
||||
standard adapter class wxStandardDialogLayoutAdapter) will make part of the dialog scrolling,
|
||||
leaving standard buttons in a non-scrolling part at the bottom of the dialog.
|
||||
This is done as follows, in wxDialogLayoutAdapter::DoLayoutAdaptation called from
|
||||
This is done as follows, in wxDialogLayoutAdapter::DoLayoutAdaptation called from
|
||||
within wxDialog::Show or wxDialog::ShowModal:
|
||||
|
||||
@li If wxDialog::GetContentWindow returns a window derived from wxBookCtrlBase,
|
||||
@li If wxDialog::GetContentWindow returns a window derived from wxBookCtrlBase,
|
||||
the pages are made scrollable and no other adaptation is done.
|
||||
@li wxWidgets looks for a wxStdDialogButtonSizer and uses it for the non-scrolling part.
|
||||
@li If that search failed, wxWidgets looks for a horizontal wxBoxSizer with one or more
|
||||
@ -67,17 +67,17 @@
|
||||
@li If that search failed too, wxWidgets finds 'loose' standard buttons (in any kind of sizer)
|
||||
and adds them to a wxStdDialogButtonSizer.
|
||||
If no standard buttons were found, the whole dialog content will scroll.
|
||||
@li All the children apart from standard buttons are reparented onto a new wxScrolledWindow
|
||||
object, using the old top-level sizer for the scrolled window and creating a new top-level
|
||||
@li All the children apart from standard buttons are reparented onto a new wxScrolledWindow
|
||||
object, using the old top-level sizer for the scrolled window and creating a new top-level
|
||||
sizer to lay out the scrolled window and standard button sizer.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection overview_dialog_autoscrolling_custom Customising scrolling adaptation
|
||||
|
||||
In addition to switching adaptation on and off globally and per dialog,
|
||||
In addition to switching adaptation on and off globally and per dialog,
|
||||
you can choose how aggressively wxWidgets will search for standard buttons by setting
|
||||
wxDialog::SetLayoutAdaptationLevel. By default, all the steps described above will be
|
||||
performed but by setting the level to 1, for example, you can choose to only look for
|
||||
wxDialog::SetLayoutAdaptationLevel. By default, all the steps described above will be
|
||||
performed but by setting the level to 1, for example, you can choose to only look for
|
||||
wxStdDialogButtonSizer.
|
||||
|
||||
You can use wxDialog::AddMainButtonId to add identifiers for buttons that should also be
|
||||
@ -88,7 +88,7 @@
|
||||
the functions CanDoLayoutAdaptation and DoLayoutAdaptation to test for adaptation applicability
|
||||
and perform the adaptation.
|
||||
|
||||
You can also override wxDialog::CanDoLayoutAdaptation and wxDialog::DoLayoutAdaptation
|
||||
You can also override wxDialog::CanDoLayoutAdaptation and wxDialog::DoLayoutAdaptation
|
||||
in a class derived from wxDialog.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ -100,13 +100,13 @@
|
||||
@li The dialog doesn't use sizers.
|
||||
@li The dialog implementation makes assumptions about the window hierarchy,
|
||||
for example getting the parent of a control and casting to the dialog class.
|
||||
@li The dialog does custom painting and/or event handling not handled by the scrolled window.
|
||||
@li The dialog does custom painting and/or event handling not handled by the scrolled window.
|
||||
If this problem can be solved globally, you can derive a new adapter class from
|
||||
wxStandardDialogLayoutAdapter and override its CreateScrolledWindow function to return
|
||||
wxStandardDialogLayoutAdapter and override its CreateScrolledWindow function to return
|
||||
an instance of your own class.
|
||||
@li The dialog has unusual layout, for example a vertical sizer containing a mixture of
|
||||
@li The dialog has unusual layout, for example a vertical sizer containing a mixture of
|
||||
standard buttons and other controls.
|
||||
@li The dialog makes assumptions about the sizer hierarchy, for example to show or hide
|
||||
@li The dialog makes assumptions about the sizer hierarchy, for example to show or hide
|
||||
children of the top-level sizer. However, the original sizer hierarchy will still hold
|
||||
until Show or ShowModal is called.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -115,19 +115,19 @@
|
||||
@li avoiding the above situations and assumptions;
|
||||
@li using wxStdDialogButtonSizer;
|
||||
@li only making assumptions about hierarchy immediately after the dialog is created;
|
||||
@li using an intermediate sizer under the main sizer, a @false top-level sizer that
|
||||
@li using an intermediate sizer under the main sizer, a @false top-level sizer that
|
||||
can be relied on to exist for the purposes of manipulating child sizers and windows;
|
||||
@li overriding wxDialog::GetContentWindow to return a book control if your dialog implements
|
||||
@li overriding wxDialog::GetContentWindow to return a book control if your dialog implements
|
||||
pages: wxWidgets will then only make the pages scrollable.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection overview_dialog_propertysheet wxPropertySheetDialog and wxWizard
|
||||
|
||||
Adaptation for wxPropertySheetDialog is always done by simply making the pages
|
||||
scrollable, since wxDialog::GetContentWindow returns the dialog's book control and
|
||||
Adaptation for wxPropertySheetDialog is always done by simply making the pages
|
||||
scrollable, since wxDialog::GetContentWindow returns the dialog's book control and
|
||||
this is handled by the standard layout adapter.
|
||||
|
||||
wxWizard uses its own CanDoLayoutAdaptation and DoLayoutAdaptation functions rather
|
||||
wxWizard uses its own CanDoLayoutAdaptation and DoLayoutAdaptation functions rather
|
||||
than the global adapter: again, only the wizard pages are made scrollable.
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
@ -29,22 +29,22 @@
|
||||
|
||||
@li @b Preparation: First of all, a data object must be created and
|
||||
initialized with the data you wish to drag. For example:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@code
|
||||
wxTextDataObject my_data("This text will be dragged.");
|
||||
@endcode
|
||||
|
||||
@li <b>Drag start</b>: To start the dragging process (typically in response to a
|
||||
mouse click) you must call wxDropSource::DoDragDrop like this:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@code
|
||||
wxDropSource dragSource( this );
|
||||
dragSource.SetData( my_data );
|
||||
wxDragResult result = dragSource.DoDragDrop( true );
|
||||
@endcode
|
||||
|
||||
@li @b Dragging: The call to DoDragDrop() blocks the program until the user releases
|
||||
the mouse button (unless you override the wxDropSource::GiveFeedback function to
|
||||
@li @b Dragging: The call to DoDragDrop() blocks the program until the user releases
|
||||
the mouse button (unless you override the wxDropSource::GiveFeedback function to
|
||||
do something special). When the mouse moves in a window of a program which understands
|
||||
the same drag-and-drop protocol (any program under Windows or any program supporting
|
||||
the XDnD protocol under X Windows), the corresponding wxDropTarget methods
|
||||
@ -56,7 +56,7 @@
|
||||
@code
|
||||
switch (result)
|
||||
{
|
||||
case wxDragCopy:
|
||||
case wxDragCopy:
|
||||
// copy the data
|
||||
break;
|
||||
case wxDragMove:
|
||||
@ -73,7 +73,7 @@
|
||||
follow the instructions below:
|
||||
|
||||
@li @b Initialization: For a window to be a drop target, it needs to have
|
||||
an associated wxDropTarget object. Normally, you will call wxWindow::SetDropTarget
|
||||
an associated wxDropTarget object. Normally, you will call wxWindow::SetDropTarget
|
||||
during window creation associating your drop target with it. You must derive a class
|
||||
from wxDropTarget and override its pure virtual methods. Alternatively, you may
|
||||
derive from wxTextDropTarget or wxFileDropTarget and override their OnDropText()
|
||||
@ -83,7 +83,7 @@
|
||||
asks the associated wxDropTarget object if it accepts the data. For this,
|
||||
a wxDataObject must be associated with the drop target and this data object will
|
||||
be responsible for the format negotiation between the drag source and the drop target.
|
||||
If all goes well, then wxDropTarget::OnData will get called and the wxDataObject belonging
|
||||
If all goes well, then wxDropTarget::OnData will get called and the wxDataObject belonging
|
||||
to the drop target can get filled with data.
|
||||
|
||||
@li <b>The end</b>: After processing the data, DoDragDrop() returns either
|
||||
|
@ -10,7 +10,7 @@
|
||||
|
||||
@page overview_docview Document/View Framework
|
||||
|
||||
Classes: wxDocument, wxView, wxDocTemplate, wxDocManager, wxDocParentFrame,
|
||||
Classes: wxDocument, wxView, wxDocTemplate, wxDocManager, wxDocParentFrame,
|
||||
wxDocChildFrame, wxDocMDIParentFrame, wxDocMDIChildFrame,
|
||||
wxCommand, wxCommandProcessor
|
||||
|
||||
@ -25,7 +25,7 @@
|
||||
If a document's data changes, all views should be updated to reflect the change.
|
||||
The framework can provide many user-interface elements based on this model.
|
||||
|
||||
Once you have defined your own classes and the relationships between them, the framework
|
||||
Once you have defined your own classes and the relationships between them, the framework
|
||||
takes care of popping up file selectors, opening and closing files, asking the user to save
|
||||
modifications, routing menu commands to appropriate (possibly default) code, even
|
||||
some default print/preview functionality and support for command undo/redo.
|
||||
@ -33,13 +33,13 @@
|
||||
The framework is highly modular, allowing overriding and replacement of functionality
|
||||
and objects to achieve more than the default behaviour.
|
||||
|
||||
These are the overall steps involved in creating an application based on the
|
||||
These are the overall steps involved in creating an application based on the
|
||||
document/view framework:
|
||||
|
||||
@li Define your own document and view classes, overriding a minimal set of
|
||||
member functions e.g. for input/output, drawing and initialization.
|
||||
@li Define any subwindows (such as a scrolled window) that are needed for the view(s).
|
||||
You may need to route some events to views or documents, for example OnPaint needs
|
||||
You may need to route some events to views or documents, for example OnPaint needs
|
||||
to be routed to wxView::OnDraw.
|
||||
@li Decide what style of interface you will use: Microsoft's MDI (multiple
|
||||
document child frames surrounded by an overall frame), SDI (a separate, unconstrained frame
|
||||
@ -136,7 +136,7 @@
|
||||
Class: wxView
|
||||
|
||||
The wxView class can be used to model the viewing and editing component of
|
||||
an application's file-based data. It is part of the document/view framework
|
||||
an application's file-based data. It is part of the document/view framework
|
||||
supported by wxWidgets, and cooperates with the wxDocument, wxDocTemplate
|
||||
and wxDocManager classes.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -179,7 +179,7 @@
|
||||
document templates, but each would be passed a different view class. When
|
||||
the user clicks on the Open menu item, the file selector is displayed
|
||||
with a list of possible file filters -- one for each wxDocTemplate. Selecting
|
||||
the filter selects the wxDocTemplate, and when a file is selected, that template
|
||||
the filter selects the wxDocTemplate, and when a file is selected, that template
|
||||
will be used for creating a document and view.
|
||||
|
||||
For the case where an application has one document type and one view type,
|
||||
@ -192,7 +192,7 @@
|
||||
See the example application in @c samples/docview.
|
||||
|
||||
To use the wxDocTemplate class, you do not need to derive a new class.
|
||||
Just pass relevant information to the constructor including CLASSINFO(YourDocumentClass)
|
||||
Just pass relevant information to the constructor including CLASSINFO(YourDocumentClass)
|
||||
and CLASSINFO(YourViewClass) to allow dynamic instance creation.
|
||||
|
||||
If you do not wish to use the wxWidgets method of creating document
|
||||
@ -210,10 +210,10 @@
|
||||
The wxDocManager class is part of the document/view framework supported by wxWidgets,
|
||||
and cooperates with the wxView, wxDocument and wxDocTemplate classes.
|
||||
|
||||
A wxDocManager instance coordinates documents, views and document templates.
|
||||
It keeps a list of document and template instances, and much functionality is routed
|
||||
through this object, such as providing selection and file dialogs.
|
||||
The application can use this class 'as is' or derive a class and override some members
|
||||
A wxDocManager instance coordinates documents, views and document templates.
|
||||
It keeps a list of document and template instances, and much functionality is routed
|
||||
through this object, such as providing selection and file dialogs.
|
||||
The application can use this class 'as is' or derive a class and override some members
|
||||
to extend or change the functionality.
|
||||
|
||||
Create an instance of this class near the beginning of your application initialization,
|
||||
@ -271,13 +271,13 @@
|
||||
to derive from it to allow different behaviour, such as popping up a scrolling
|
||||
list of files.
|
||||
|
||||
By calling wxFileHistory::UseMenu() you can associate a file menu with the file history.
|
||||
By calling wxFileHistory::UseMenu() you can associate a file menu with the file history.
|
||||
The menu will then be used for appending filenames that are added to the history.
|
||||
|
||||
Please notice that currently if the history already contained filenames when UseMenu()
|
||||
Please notice that currently if the history already contained filenames when UseMenu()
|
||||
is called (e.g. when initializing a second MDI child frame), the menu is not automatically
|
||||
initialized with the existing filenames in the history and so you need to call
|
||||
wxFileHistory::AddFilesToMenu() after UseMenu() explicitly in order to initialize the menu with
|
||||
wxFileHistory::AddFilesToMenu() after UseMenu() explicitly in order to initialize the menu with
|
||||
the existing list of MRU files (otherwise an assertion failure is raised in debug builds).
|
||||
|
||||
The filenames are appended using menu identifiers in the range @c wxID_FILE1 to @c wxID_FILE9.
|
||||
|
@ -63,9 +63,9 @@
|
||||
member function in a derived class will not have any effect. These member
|
||||
functions take an event argument, and the class of event differs according to
|
||||
the type of event and the class of the originating window. For size events,
|
||||
wxSizeEvent is used. For menu commands and most control commands
|
||||
wxSizeEvent is used. For menu commands and most control commands
|
||||
(such as button presses), wxCommandEvent is used. When controls get more
|
||||
complicated, then specific event classes are used, such as wxTreeEvent for
|
||||
complicated, then specific event classes are used, such as wxTreeEvent for
|
||||
events from wxTreeCtrl windows.
|
||||
|
||||
As well as the event table in the implementation file, there must also be a
|
||||
@ -152,9 +152,9 @@
|
||||
@li If the object is a wxWindow, @b ProcessEvent is recursively called on the window's
|
||||
wxValidator. If this returns @true, the function exits.
|
||||
@li @b SearchEventTable is called for this event handler. If this fails, the base
|
||||
class table is tried, and so on until no more tables exist or an appropriate
|
||||
class table is tried, and so on until no more tables exist or an appropriate
|
||||
function was found, in which case the function exits.
|
||||
@li The search is applied down the entire chain of event handlers (usually the chain has
|
||||
@li The search is applied down the entire chain of event handlers (usually the chain has
|
||||
a length of one). If this succeeds, the function exits.
|
||||
@li If the object is a wxWindow and the event is set to set to propagate (in the library only
|
||||
wxCommandEvent based events are set to propagate), @b ProcessEvent is recursively applied
|
||||
@ -232,13 +232,13 @@
|
||||
|
||||
While generically wxEvents can be generated both by user
|
||||
actions (e.g. resize of a wxWindow) and by calls to functions
|
||||
(e.g. wxWindow::SetSize), wxWidgets controls normally send wxCommandEvent-derived
|
||||
(e.g. wxWindow::SetSize), wxWidgets controls normally send wxCommandEvent-derived
|
||||
events only for the user-generated events. The only @b exceptions to this rule are:
|
||||
|
||||
@li wxNotebook::AddPage: No event-free alternatives
|
||||
@li wxNotebook::AdvanceSelection: No event-free alternatives
|
||||
@li wxNotebook::DeletePage: No event-free alternatives
|
||||
@li wxNotebook::SetSelection: Use wxNotebook::ChangeSelection instead, as
|
||||
@li wxNotebook::SetSelection: Use wxNotebook::ChangeSelection instead, as
|
||||
wxNotebook::SetSelection is deprecated
|
||||
@li wxTreeCtrl::Delete: No event-free alternatives
|
||||
@li wxTreeCtrl::DeleteAllItems: No event-free alternatives
|
||||
@ -255,7 +255,7 @@
|
||||
|
||||
In fact, you don't have to derive a new class from a window class
|
||||
if you don't want to. You can derive a new class from wxEvtHandler instead,
|
||||
defining the appropriate event table, and then call wxWindow::SetEventHandler
|
||||
defining the appropriate event table, and then call wxWindow::SetEventHandler
|
||||
(or, preferably, wxWindow::PushEventHandler) to make this
|
||||
event handler the object that responds to events. This way, you can avoid
|
||||
a lot of class derivation, and use instances of the same event handler class (but different
|
||||
@ -461,7 +461,7 @@
|
||||
@row2col{EVT_CUSTOM_RANGE(event\, id1\, id2\, func),
|
||||
The same as EVT_CUSTOM, but responds to a range of window identifiers.}
|
||||
@row2col{EVT_COMMAND(id\, event\, func),
|
||||
The same as EVT_CUSTOM, but expects a member function with a
|
||||
The same as EVT_CUSTOM, but expects a member function with a
|
||||
wxCommandEvent argument.}
|
||||
@row2col{EVT_COMMAND_RANGE(id1\, id2\, event\, func),
|
||||
The same as EVT_CUSTOM_RANGE, but
|
||||
|
@ -36,7 +36,7 @@
|
||||
Its main methods are ChangePathTo() and OpenFile(). This class
|
||||
is most often used by the end user.
|
||||
@li The wxFileSystemHandler is the core
|
||||
of virtual file systems mechanism. You can derive your own handler and pass
|
||||
of virtual file systems mechanism. You can derive your own handler and pass
|
||||
it to the VFS mechanism. You can derive your own handler and pass it to
|
||||
wxFileSystem's AddHandler() method. In the new handler you only need to
|
||||
override the OpenFile() and CanOpen() methods.
|
||||
|
@ -26,14 +26,14 @@
|
||||
|
||||
@beginDefList
|
||||
@itemdef{Point size, This is the standard way of referring to text size.}
|
||||
@itemdef{Family,
|
||||
@itemdef{Family,
|
||||
Supported families are:
|
||||
@b wxDEFAULT, @b wxDECORATIVE, @b wxROMAN, @b wxSCRIPT, @b wxSWISS, @b wxMODERN.
|
||||
@b wxMODERN is a fixed pitch font; the others are either fixed or variable pitch.}
|
||||
@itemdef{Style, The value can be @b wxNORMAL, @b wxSLANT or @b wxITALIC.}
|
||||
@itemdef{Weight, The value can be @b wxNORMAL, @b wxLIGHT or @b wxBOLD.}
|
||||
@itemdef{Underlining, The value can be @true or @false.}
|
||||
@itemdef{Face name,
|
||||
@itemdef{Face name,
|
||||
An optional string specifying the actual typeface to be used. If @NULL,
|
||||
a default typeface will chosen based on the family.}
|
||||
@itemdef{Encoding,
|
||||
|
@ -21,8 +21,8 @@
|
||||
(see @ref overview_unicode).
|
||||
|
||||
Font encoding support is ensured by several classes:
|
||||
wxFont itself, but also wxFontEnumerator and wxFontMapper. wxFont encoding
|
||||
support is reflected by a (new) constructor parameter @e encoding which takes
|
||||
wxFont itself, but also wxFontEnumerator and wxFontMapper. wxFont encoding
|
||||
support is reflected by a (new) constructor parameter @e encoding which takes
|
||||
one of the following values (elements of enumeration type @c wxFontEncoding):
|
||||
|
||||
@beginDefList
|
||||
|
@ -54,7 +54,7 @@
|
||||
giving it a menu and a status bar in its constructor. Also, any class
|
||||
that wishes to respond to any "event" (such as mouse clicks or
|
||||
messages from the menu or a button) must declare an event table
|
||||
using the macro below.
|
||||
using the macro below.
|
||||
|
||||
Finally, the way to react to such events must be done in "handlers".
|
||||
In our sample, we react to two menu items, one for "Quit" and one for
|
||||
|
@ -16,7 +16,7 @@
|
||||
|
||||
wxHTML can be used as a generic rich text viewer - for example to display
|
||||
a nice About Box (like those of GNOME apps) or to display the result of
|
||||
database searching. There is a wxFileSystem class which allows you to use
|
||||
database searching. There is a wxFileSystem class which allows you to use
|
||||
your own virtual file systems.
|
||||
|
||||
wxHtmlWindow supports tag handlers. This means that you can easily
|
||||
@ -60,7 +60,7 @@
|
||||
@endcode
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection overview_html_quickstart_disphelp Displaying Help
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
See wxHtmlHelpController.
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection overview_html_quickstart_settingup Setting up wxHtmlWindow
|
||||
@ -113,30 +113,30 @@
|
||||
wxHtmlPrintout, normal wxWidgets printout class.
|
||||
|
||||
And finally there is the low level class wxHtmlDCRenderer which you can use to
|
||||
render HTML into a rectangular area on any DC.
|
||||
render HTML into a rectangular area on any DC.
|
||||
|
||||
It supports rendering into multiple rectangles with the same
|
||||
width. (The most common use of this is placing one rectangle on each page or
|
||||
width. (The most common use of this is placing one rectangle on each page or
|
||||
printing into two columns.)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@section overview_html_helpformats Help Files Format
|
||||
|
||||
wxHTML library uses a reduced version of MS HTML Workshop format.
|
||||
Tex2RTF can produce these files when generating HTML, if you set
|
||||
Tex2RTF can produce these files when generating HTML, if you set
|
||||
@b htmlWorkshopFiles to @true in your tex2rtf.ini file.
|
||||
(See wxHtmlHelpController for help controller description.)
|
||||
|
||||
A @b book consists of three files: the header file, the contents file
|
||||
A @b book consists of three files: the header file, the contents file
|
||||
and the index file.
|
||||
|
||||
You can make a regular zip archive of these files, plus the HTML and any
|
||||
image files, for wxHTML (or helpview) to read; and the @c .zip file can
|
||||
You can make a regular zip archive of these files, plus the HTML and any
|
||||
image files, for wxHTML (or helpview) to read; and the @c .zip file can
|
||||
optionally be renamed to @c .htb.
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection overview_html_helpformats_hhp Header file (.hhp)
|
||||
|
||||
The header file must contain these lines (and may contain additional lines
|
||||
The header file must contain these lines (and may contain additional lines
|
||||
which are ignored):
|
||||
|
||||
@code
|
||||
@ -212,8 +212,8 @@
|
||||
@endcode
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection overview_html_helpformats_hhk Index file (.hhk)
|
||||
|
||||
Index files have same format as contents file except that ID params are ignored
|
||||
|
||||
Index files have same format as contents file except that ID params are ignored
|
||||
and sublists are @b not allowed.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ -222,7 +222,7 @@
|
||||
The wxHTML library provides a mechanism for reading and displaying
|
||||
files of many different file formats.
|
||||
|
||||
wxHtmlWindow::LoadPage can load not only HTML files but any known file.
|
||||
wxHtmlWindow::LoadPage can load not only HTML files but any known file.
|
||||
To make a file type known to wxHtmlWindow you must create a wxHtmlFilter filter and
|
||||
register it using wxHtmlWindow::AddFilter.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -251,15 +251,15 @@
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection overview_html_cells_conttaghandler Using Containers in Tag Handler
|
||||
|
||||
wxHtmlWinParser provides a user-friendly way of managing containers.
|
||||
wxHtmlWinParser provides a user-friendly way of managing containers.
|
||||
It is based on the idea of opening and closing containers.
|
||||
|
||||
Use wxHtmlWinParser::OpenContainer to open new a container @e within an already
|
||||
Use wxHtmlWinParser::OpenContainer to open new a container @e within an already
|
||||
opened container.
|
||||
This new container is a @e sub-container of the old one. (If you want to create a
|
||||
This new container is a @e sub-container of the old one. (If you want to create a
|
||||
new container with the same depth level you can call @c CloseContainer(); OpenContainer();.)
|
||||
|
||||
Use wxHtmlWinParser::CloseContainer to close the container.
|
||||
Use wxHtmlWinParser::CloseContainer to close the container.
|
||||
This doesn't create a new container with same depth level but it returns "control"
|
||||
to the parent container. See explanation:
|
||||
|
||||
@ -323,7 +323,7 @@
|
||||
@li Parse text between the tag and paired ending tag (if present)
|
||||
@li Restore original parser state
|
||||
|
||||
See wxHtmlWinParser for methods for modifying parser's state.
|
||||
See wxHtmlWinParser for methods for modifying parser's state.
|
||||
In general you can do things like opening/closing containers, changing colors, fonts etc.
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection overview_html_handlers_custom Providing own tag handlers
|
||||
@ -346,7 +346,7 @@
|
||||
for details). Handler definition must start with @b TAG_HANDLER_BEGIN macro
|
||||
and end with @b TAG_HANDLER_END macro.
|
||||
|
||||
I strongly recommend to have a look at @e include/wxhtml/mod_templ.h file.
|
||||
I strongly recommend to have a look at @e include/wxhtml/mod_templ.h file.
|
||||
Otherwise you won't understand the structure of macros.
|
||||
|
||||
See macros reference:
|
||||
@ -360,7 +360,7 @@
|
||||
@li @b TAG_HANDLER_VARS:
|
||||
This macro starts block of variables definitions. (Variables are identical
|
||||
to class attributes.) Example:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@code
|
||||
TAG_HANDLER_BEGIN(VARS_ONLY, "CRAZYTAG")
|
||||
TAG_HANDLER_VARS
|
||||
@ -368,14 +368,14 @@
|
||||
wxString something_else;
|
||||
TAG_HANDLER_END(VARS_ONLY)
|
||||
@endcode
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
This macro is used only in rare cases.
|
||||
|
||||
@li @b TAG_HANDLER_CONSTR(@e name):
|
||||
This macro supplies object constructor. @e name is same name as the one
|
||||
from TAG_HANDLER_BEGIN macro. Body of constructor follow after
|
||||
this macro (you must use { and } ). Example:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@code
|
||||
TAG_HANDLER_BEGIN(VARS2, "CRAZYTAG")
|
||||
TAG_HANDLER_VARS
|
||||
@ -386,7 +386,7 @@
|
||||
} // !!!!!!
|
||||
TAG_HANDLER_END(VARS2)
|
||||
@endcode
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Never used in wxHTML :-)
|
||||
|
||||
@li @b TAG_HANDLER_PROC(@e varib):
|
||||
@ -395,7 +395,7 @@
|
||||
@e tag. Body of method follows after this macro.
|
||||
Note than you must use { and } !
|
||||
Example:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@code
|
||||
TAG_HANDLER_BEGIN(TITLE, "TITLE")
|
||||
TAG_HANDLER_PROC(tag)
|
||||
@ -423,7 +423,7 @@
|
||||
@li @b TAGS_MODULE_END(@e modname):
|
||||
Ends the definition of module.
|
||||
Example:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@code
|
||||
TAGS_MODULE_BEGIN(Examples)
|
||||
TAGS_MODULE_ADD(VARS_ONLY)
|
||||
@ -442,7 +442,7 @@
|
||||
Following tables list all tags known to wxHTML, together with supported parameters.
|
||||
|
||||
A tag has general form of @c tagname param_1 param_2 ... param_n where param_i is
|
||||
either @c paramname="paramvalue" or @c paramname=paramvalue - these two are equivalent.
|
||||
either @c paramname="paramvalue" or @c paramname=paramvalue - these two are equivalent.
|
||||
Unless stated otherwise, wxHTML is case-insensitive.
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection overview_html_supptags_commonvalues Table of common parameter values
|
||||
|
@ -295,7 +295,7 @@ MyDialog::MyDialog(wxFrame *parent, wxWindowID id, const wxString &title )
|
||||
{
|
||||
wxBoxSizer *topsizer = new wxBoxSizer( wxVERTICAL );
|
||||
|
||||
// create text ctrl with minimal size 100x60 that is horizontally and
|
||||
// create text ctrl with minimal size 100x60 that is horizontally and
|
||||
// vertically stretchable with a border width of 10
|
||||
topsizer->Add(
|
||||
new wxTextCtrl( this, -1, "My text.", wxDefaultPosition, wxSize(100,60), wxTE_MULTILINE),
|
||||
@ -303,20 +303,20 @@ MyDialog::MyDialog(wxFrame *parent, wxWindowID id, const wxString &title )
|
||||
|
||||
wxBoxSizer *button_sizer = new wxBoxSizer( wxHORIZONTAL );
|
||||
|
||||
//create two buttons that are horizontally unstretchable,
|
||||
//create two buttons that are horizontally unstretchable,
|
||||
// with an all-around border with a width of 10 and implicit top alignment
|
||||
button_sizer->Add(
|
||||
new wxButton( this, wxID_OK, "OK" ),
|
||||
wxSizerFlags(0).Align().Border(wxALL, 10));
|
||||
wxSizerFlags(0).Align().Border(wxALL, 10));
|
||||
|
||||
button_sizer->Add(
|
||||
new wxButton( this, wxID_CANCEL, "Cancel" ),
|
||||
wxSizerFlags(0).Align().Border(wxALL, 10));
|
||||
wxSizerFlags(0).Align().Border(wxALL, 10));
|
||||
|
||||
//create a sizer with no border and centered horizontally
|
||||
topsizer->Add(
|
||||
button_sizer,
|
||||
wxSizerFlags(0).Center() );
|
||||
wxSizerFlags(0).Center() );
|
||||
|
||||
SetSizerAndFit(topsizer); // use the sizer for layout and set size and hints
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ if (in_stream.Read(data, nb_datas).LastError() != wxSTREAM_NOERROR) {
|
||||
// You can also get the last number of bytes REALLY put into the buffer.
|
||||
size_t really_read = in_stream.LastRead();
|
||||
|
||||
// Ok, moves to the beginning of the stream. SeekI returns the last position
|
||||
// Ok, moves to the beginning of the stream. SeekI returns the last position
|
||||
// in the stream counted from the beginning.
|
||||
off_t old_position = in_stream.SeekI(0, wxFromBeginning);
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -466,7 +466,7 @@ initialized.
|
||||
|
||||
A simple example will help understand how the scheme works. Suppose you have a
|
||||
XRC file defining a top level window @c TestWnd_Base, which subclasses wxFrame
|
||||
(any other class like @c wxDialog will do also), and has subwidgets wxTextCtrl A
|
||||
(any other class like @c wxDialog will do also), and has subwidgets wxTextCtrl A
|
||||
and wxButton B.
|
||||
|
||||
The XRC file and corresponding class definition in the header file will be
|
||||
@ -624,7 +624,7 @@ wxObject *MyControlXmlHandler::DoCreateResource()
|
||||
// do most of your work.
|
||||
// If e.g. the MyControl::Create function looks like:
|
||||
//
|
||||
// bool MyControl::Create(wxWindow *parent, int id,
|
||||
// bool MyControl::Create(wxWindow *parent, int id,
|
||||
// const wxBitmap &first, const wxPoint &posFirst,
|
||||
// const wxBitmap &second, const wxPoint &posSecond,
|
||||
// const wxString &theTitle, const wxFont &titleFont,
|
||||
|
@ -47,21 +47,21 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Adds an artist name to be shown in the program credits.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetArtists()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void AddArtist(const wxString& artist);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Adds a developer name to be shown in the program credits.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetDevelopers()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void AddDeveloper(const wxString& developer);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Adds a documentation writer name to be shown in the program credits.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetDocWriters()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void AddDocWriter(const wxString& docwriter);
|
||||
@ -72,14 +72,14 @@ public:
|
||||
translation of the string @c translator-credits from the currently used message
|
||||
catalog -- this can be used to show just the name of the translator of the
|
||||
program in the current language.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetTranslators()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void AddTranslator(const wxString& translator);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the the list of artists to be shown in the program credits.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see AddArtist()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetArtists(const wxArrayString& artists);
|
||||
@ -99,14 +99,14 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Set the list of developers of the program.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see AddDeveloper()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetDevelopers(const wxArrayString& developers);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Set the list of documentation writers.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see AddDocWriter()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetDocWriters(const wxArrayString& docwriters);
|
||||
|
@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the accelerator entry parameters.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param flags
|
||||
A combination of the wxAcceleratorEntryFlags values, which
|
||||
indicates which modifier keys are held down.
|
||||
@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Initializes the accelerator table from an array of wxAcceleratorEntry.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param n
|
||||
Number of accelerator entries.
|
||||
@param entries
|
||||
@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Loads the accelerator table from a Windows resource (Windows only).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param resource
|
||||
Name of a Windows accelerator.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Assignment operator, using @ref overview_refcount "reference counting".
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param accel
|
||||
Accelerator table to assign.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
@ -382,7 +382,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a status value and object id to indicate whether the given point
|
||||
was on this or a child object. Can return either a child object, or an
|
||||
was on this or a child object. Can return either a child object, or an
|
||||
integer representing the child element, starting from 1.
|
||||
|
||||
@a pt is in screen coordinates.
|
||||
|
@ -70,11 +70,11 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Creates the control with the given @a anim animation.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
After control creation you must explicitely call Play() to start to play
|
||||
the animation. Until that function won't be called, the first frame
|
||||
of the animation is displayed.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param parent
|
||||
Parent window, must be non-@NULL.
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ public:
|
||||
The window style, see wxAC_* flags.
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
Control name.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if the control was successfully created or @false if
|
||||
creation failed.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@ -192,7 +192,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Loads an animation from a file.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
The name of the file to load.
|
||||
@param type
|
||||
@ -235,7 +235,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Loads an animation from the given stream.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param stream
|
||||
The stream to use to load the animation.
|
||||
@param type
|
||||
@ -243,7 +243,7 @@ public:
|
||||
@li wxANIMATION_TYPE_GIF: loads an animated GIF file;
|
||||
@li wxANIMATION_TYPE_ANI: load an ANI file;
|
||||
@li wxANIMATION_TYPE_ANY: tries to autodetect the filetype.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if the operation succeeded, @false otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Load(wxInputStream& stream,
|
||||
@ -251,13 +251,13 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Loads an animation from a file.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
A filename.
|
||||
@param type
|
||||
One of the wxAnimationType values; wxANIMATION_TYPE_ANY
|
||||
means that the function should try to autodetect the filetype.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if the operation succeeded, @false otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool LoadFile(const wxString& name,
|
||||
|
@ -48,14 +48,14 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Creates a wxLog class for the application to use for logging errors.
|
||||
The default implementation returns a new wxLogGui class.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxLog
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual wxLog* CreateLogTarget();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Creates the wxAppTraits object when GetTraits() needs it for the first time.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxAppTraits
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual wxAppTraits* CreateTraits();
|
||||
@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ public:
|
||||
while (app.Pending())
|
||||
Dispatch();
|
||||
@endcode
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Pending()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void Dispatch();
|
||||
@ -92,24 +92,24 @@ public:
|
||||
int FilterEvent(wxEvent& event);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the user-readable application name.
|
||||
|
||||
Returns the user-readable application name.
|
||||
|
||||
The difference between this string and the one returned by GetAppName() is that
|
||||
this one is meant to be shown to the user and so should be used for the window
|
||||
titles, page headers and so on while the other one should be only used internally,
|
||||
e.g. for the file names or configuration file keys.
|
||||
By default, returns the same string as GetAppName().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@wxsince{2.9.0}
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetAppDisplayName() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the application name.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks wxWidgets sets this to a reasonable default before calling
|
||||
OnInit(), but the application can reset it at will.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetAppDisplayName()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetAppName() const;
|
||||
@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the class name of the application. The class name may be used in a
|
||||
platform specific manner to refer to the application.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetClassName()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetClassName() const;
|
||||
@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the application will exit when the top-level window is
|
||||
deleted, @false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetExitOnFrameDelete(), @ref overview_app_shutdown
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetExitOnFrameDelete() const;
|
||||
@ -133,18 +133,18 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the one and only global application object.
|
||||
Usually ::wxTheApp is usead instead.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetInstance()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxAppConsole* GetInstance();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a pointer to the top window.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks If the top window hasn't been set using SetTopWindow(),
|
||||
this function will find the first top-level window
|
||||
(frame or dialog) and return that.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetTopWindow()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual wxWindow* GetTopWindow() const;
|
||||
@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the application will use the best visual on systems that support
|
||||
different visuals, @false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetUseBestVisual()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetUseBestVisual() const;
|
||||
@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ public:
|
||||
configuration file keys.
|
||||
|
||||
By default, returns the same string as GetVendorName().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@wxsince{2.9.0}
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetVendorDisplayName() const;
|
||||
@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the application is active, i.e. if one of its windows is
|
||||
currently in the foreground.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
If this function returns @false and you need to attract users attention to
|
||||
the application, you may use wxTopLevelWindow::RequestUserAttention to do it.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@ -245,7 +245,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Called by wxWidgets on creation of the application. Override this if you wish
|
||||
to provide your own (environment-dependent) main loop.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns Returns 0 under X, and the wParam of the WM_QUIT message under
|
||||
Windows.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@ -259,7 +259,7 @@ public:
|
||||
asserts are not left in the release code at all.
|
||||
The base class version shows the default assert failure dialog box proposing to
|
||||
the user to stop the program, continue or ignore all subsequent asserts.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param file
|
||||
the name of the source file where the assert occurred
|
||||
@param line
|
||||
@ -285,7 +285,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
Return @true to continue normal execution or @false to return
|
||||
@false from OnInit() thus terminating the program.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see OnInitCmdLine()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool OnCmdLineError(wxCmdLineParser& parser);
|
||||
@ -296,7 +296,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
Return @true to continue normal execution or @false to return
|
||||
@false from OnInit() thus terminating the program.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see OnInitCmdLine()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool OnCmdLineHelp(wxCmdLineParser& parser);
|
||||
@ -310,7 +310,7 @@ public:
|
||||
processing of the standard command line options.
|
||||
Return @true to continue normal execution or @false to return @false from
|
||||
OnInit() thus terminating the program.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see OnInitCmdLine()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool OnCmdLineParsed(wxCmdLineParser& parser);
|
||||
@ -353,7 +353,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Generally speaking, this function should only show a message to the user and
|
||||
return. You may attempt to save unsaved data but this is not guaranteed to
|
||||
work and, in fact, probably won't.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxHandleFatalExceptions()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void OnFatalException();
|
||||
@ -408,7 +408,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if unprocessed events are in the window system event queue.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Dispatch()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual bool Pending();
|
||||
@ -420,9 +420,9 @@ public:
|
||||
The function returns @true if the message was processed, @false otherwise.
|
||||
If you use wxWidgets with another class library with its own message loop,
|
||||
you should make sure that this function is called to allow wxWidgets to
|
||||
receive messages. For example, to allow co-existence with the Microsoft
|
||||
receive messages. For example, to allow co-existence with the Microsoft
|
||||
Foundation Classes, override the PreTranslateMessage function:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@code
|
||||
// Provide wxWidgets message loop compatibility
|
||||
BOOL CTheApp::PreTranslateMessage(MSG *msg)
|
||||
@ -440,11 +440,11 @@ public:
|
||||
Sends idle events to a window and its children.
|
||||
Please note that this function is internal to wxWidgets and shouldn't be used
|
||||
by user code.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks These functions poll the top-level windows, and their children,
|
||||
for idle event processing. If @true is returned, more OnIdle
|
||||
processing is requested by one or more window.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxIdleEvent
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool SendIdleEvents(wxWindow* win, wxIdleEvent& event);
|
||||
@ -463,7 +463,7 @@ public:
|
||||
SetAppDisplayName() is used instead.
|
||||
|
||||
By default the application name is set to the name of its executable file.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetAppName()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetAppName(const wxString& name);
|
||||
@ -471,7 +471,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the class name of the application. This may be used in a platform specific
|
||||
manner to refer to the application.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetClassName()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetClassName(const wxString& name);
|
||||
@ -479,11 +479,11 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Allows the programmer to specify whether the application will exit when the
|
||||
top-level frame is deleted.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param flag
|
||||
If @true (the default), the application will exit when the top-level frame
|
||||
is deleted. If @false, the application will continue to run.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetExitOnFrameDelete(), @ref overview_app_shutdown
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetExitOnFrameDelete(bool flag);
|
||||
@ -491,10 +491,10 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Allows external code to modify global ::wxTheApp, but you should really
|
||||
know what you're doing if you call it.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param app
|
||||
Replacement for the global application object.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetInstance()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static void SetInstance(wxAppConsole* app);
|
||||
@ -504,7 +504,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
Currently implemented for wxGTK2-only.
|
||||
Return @true if theme was successfully changed.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param theme
|
||||
The name of the new theme or an absolute path to a gtkrc-theme-file
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@ -517,10 +517,10 @@ public:
|
||||
can use a specific window as the top window. If no top window is specified by the
|
||||
application, wxWidgets just uses the first frame or dialog in its top-level window
|
||||
list, when it needs to use the top window.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param window
|
||||
The new top window.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetTopWindow(), OnInit()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetTopWindow(wxWindow* window);
|
||||
@ -534,7 +534,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Note that this function has to be called in the constructor of the wxApp
|
||||
instance and won't have any effect when called later on.
|
||||
This function currently only has effect under GTK.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param flag
|
||||
If @true, the app will use the best visual.
|
||||
@param forceTrueColour
|
||||
@ -553,7 +553,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the name of application's vendor. The name will be used
|
||||
in registry access. A default name is set by wxWidgets.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetVendorName()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetVendorName(const wxString& name);
|
||||
@ -783,7 +783,7 @@ int wxEntry(int& argc, wxChar** argv);
|
||||
// OnExit isn't called by CleanUp so must be called explicitly.
|
||||
wxTheApp->OnExit();
|
||||
wxApp::CleanUp();
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
return CWinApp::ExitInstance();
|
||||
}
|
||||
@endcode
|
||||
|
@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
The names of directory entries are returned without any trailing path
|
||||
separator. This gives a canonical name that can be used in comparisons.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see @ref overview_archive_byname
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetInternalName() const;
|
||||
@ -327,7 +327,7 @@ enum wxStreamProtocolType
|
||||
wxArchiveClassFactory::Find can also search for a factory by MIME type
|
||||
or wxFileSystem protocol.
|
||||
|
||||
The available factories can be enumerated using
|
||||
The available factories can be enumerated using
|
||||
wxArchiveClassFactory::GetFirst() and wxArchiveClassFactory::GetNext().
|
||||
|
||||
@library{wxbase}
|
||||
@ -381,13 +381,13 @@ public:
|
||||
@code
|
||||
wxString list;
|
||||
const wxArchiveClassFactory *factory = wxArchiveClassFactory::GetFirst();
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
while (factory) {
|
||||
list << factory->GetProtocol() << _T("\n");
|
||||
factory = factory->GetNext();
|
||||
}
|
||||
@endcode
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetFirst() and GetNext() return a pointer to a factory or @NULL if no more
|
||||
are available. They do not give away ownership of the factory.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@ -418,7 +418,7 @@ public:
|
||||
@code
|
||||
wxString list;
|
||||
const wxChar *const *p;
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
for (p = factory->GetProtocols(wxSTREAM_FILEEXT); *p; p++)
|
||||
list << *p << _T("\n");
|
||||
@encode
|
||||
@ -529,7 +529,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
The first template parameter should be the type of archive input stream
|
||||
(e.g. wxArchiveInputStream) and the second can either be a pointer to an entry
|
||||
(e.g. wxArchiveEntry*), or a string/pointer pair (e.g. std::pairwxString,
|
||||
(e.g. wxArchiveEntry*), or a string/pointer pair (e.g. std::pairwxString,
|
||||
wxArchiveEntry*).
|
||||
|
||||
The @c wx/archive.h header defines the following typedefs:
|
||||
|
@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Empties the array: after a call to this function GetCount() will return 0.
|
||||
However, this function does not free the memory used by the array and so
|
||||
However, this function does not free the memory used by the array and so
|
||||
should be used when the array is going to be reused for storing other strings.
|
||||
Otherwise, you should use Clear() to empty the array and free memory.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ public:
|
||||
@code
|
||||
Insert("foo", 0);
|
||||
@endcode
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
If @a nIndex is equal to @e GetCount() this function behaves as Add().
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Insert(const wxString& str, size_t nIndex,
|
||||
@ -207,7 +207,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sorts the array using the specified @a compareFunction for item comparison.
|
||||
@e CompareFunction is defined as a function taking two @e const wxString
|
||||
parameters and returning an @e int value less than, equal to or greater
|
||||
parameters and returning an @e int value less than, equal to or greater
|
||||
than 0 if the first string is less than, equal to or greater than the
|
||||
second one.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -219,16 +219,16 @@ public:
|
||||
{
|
||||
return first.length() - second.length();
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
...
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxArrayString array;
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
array.Add("one");
|
||||
array.Add("two");
|
||||
array.Add("three");
|
||||
array.Add("four");
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
array.Sort(CompareStringLen);
|
||||
@endcode
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@ -307,7 +307,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@copydoc wxArrayString::Index()
|
||||
|
||||
This function uses binary search for wxSortedArrayString, but it ignores
|
||||
This function uses binary search for wxSortedArrayString, but it ignores
|
||||
the @a bCase and @a bFromEnd parameters.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int Index(const wxString& sz, bool bCase = true,
|
||||
|
@ -132,14 +132,14 @@
|
||||
Client is the entity that calls wxArtProvider's GetBitmap or GetIcon function.
|
||||
It is represented by wxClientID type and can have one of these values:
|
||||
|
||||
@li wxART_TOOLBAR
|
||||
@li wxART_MENU
|
||||
@li wxART_BUTTON
|
||||
@li wxART_FRAME_ICON
|
||||
@li wxART_CMN_DIALOG
|
||||
@li wxART_HELP_BROWSER
|
||||
@li wxART_MESSAGE_BOX
|
||||
@li wxART_OTHER (used for all requests that don't fit into any of the
|
||||
@li wxART_TOOLBAR
|
||||
@li wxART_MENU
|
||||
@li wxART_BUTTON
|
||||
@li wxART_FRAME_ICON
|
||||
@li wxART_CMN_DIALOG
|
||||
@li wxART_HELP_BROWSER
|
||||
@li wxART_MESSAGE_BOX
|
||||
@li wxART_OTHER (used for all requests that don't fit into any of the
|
||||
categories above)
|
||||
|
||||
Client ID servers as a hint to wxArtProvider that is supposed to help it to
|
||||
@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ public:
|
||||
resource. Note that returned bitmaps are cached by wxArtProvider and it is
|
||||
therefore not necessary to optimize CreateBitmap() for speed (e.g. you may
|
||||
create wxBitmap objects from XPMs here).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
wxArtID unique identifier of the bitmap.
|
||||
@param client
|
||||
@ -182,7 +182,7 @@ public:
|
||||
This is not part of wxArtProvider's public API, use wxArtProvider::GetBitmap
|
||||
or wxArtProvider::GetIconBundle or wxArtProvider::GetIcon to query wxArtProvider
|
||||
for a resource.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see CreateIconBundle()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxBitmap CreateBitmap(const wxArtID& id,
|
||||
@ -203,14 +203,14 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Query registered providers for bitmap with given ID.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
wxArtID unique identifier of the bitmap.
|
||||
@param client
|
||||
wxArtClient identifier of the client (i.e. who is asking for the bitmap).
|
||||
@param size
|
||||
Size of the returned bitmap or wxDefaultSize if size doesn't matter.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns The bitmap if one of registered providers recognizes the ID or
|
||||
wxNullBitmap otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@ -238,13 +238,13 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Query registered providers for icon bundle with given ID.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
wxArtID unique identifier of the icon bundle.
|
||||
@param client
|
||||
wxArtClient identifier of the client (i.e. who is asking for the icon
|
||||
bundle).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns The icon bundle if one of registered providers recognizes the ID
|
||||
or wxNullIconBundle otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@ -254,7 +254,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Register new art provider and add it to the bottom of providers stack
|
||||
(i.e. it will be queried as the last one).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Push()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static void Insert(wxArtProvider* provider);
|
||||
@ -267,7 +267,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Register new art provider and add it to the top of providers stack
|
||||
(i.e. it will be queried as the first provider).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Insert()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static void Push(wxArtProvider* provider);
|
||||
|
@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ size_t wxBase64EncodedSize(size_t len);
|
||||
The length of the input string or special value wxNO_LEN if the string is
|
||||
NUL-terminated and the length should be computed by this function itself.
|
||||
@param mode
|
||||
This parameter specifies the function behaviour when invalid characters
|
||||
This parameter specifies the function behaviour when invalid characters
|
||||
are encountered in input. By default, any such character stops the
|
||||
decoding with error. If the mode is wxBase64DecodeMode_SkipWS, then the
|
||||
white space characters are silently skipped instead. And if it is
|
||||
@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ size_t wxBase64Decode(void* dst, size_t dstLen,
|
||||
This overload allocates memory internally and returns it as wxMemoryBuffer
|
||||
and is recommended for normal use.
|
||||
|
||||
This overload returns a buffer with the base64 decoded binary equivalent
|
||||
This overload returns a buffer with the base64 decoded binary equivalent
|
||||
of the input string. In neither case is the buffer @NULL-terminated.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxMemoryBuffer wxBase64Decode(const char* src,
|
||||
|
@ -278,42 +278,42 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the background colour of the header part of the calendar window.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetHeaderColours()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxColour GetHeaderColourBg() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the foreground colour of the header part of the calendar window.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetHeaderColours()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxColour GetHeaderColourFg() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the background highlight colour.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetHighlightColours()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxColour GetHighlightColourBg() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the foreground highlight colour.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetHighlightColours()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxColour GetHighlightColourFg() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Return the background colour currently used for holiday highlighting.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetHolidayColours()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxColour GetHolidayColourBg() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Return the foreground colour currently used for holiday highlighting.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetHolidayColours()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxColour GetHolidayColourFg() const;
|
||||
|
@ -58,13 +58,13 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Get the caret position (in pixels).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b GetPosition()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Returns a Wx::Point
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b GetPositionXY()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Returns a 2-element list
|
||||
@c ( x, y )
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@ -75,13 +75,13 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Get the caret size.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b GetSize()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Returns a Wx::Size
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b GetSizeWH()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Returns a 2-element list
|
||||
@c ( width, height )
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@ -121,11 +121,11 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the blink time for all the carets.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks Under Windows, this function will change the blink time for all
|
||||
carets permanently (until the next time it is called),
|
||||
even for the carets in other applications.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetBlinkTime()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static void SetBlinkTime(int milliseconds);
|
||||
|
@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructor, creating and showing a checkbox.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param parent
|
||||
Parent window. Must not be @NULL.
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Window validator.
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
Window name.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Create(), wxValidator
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxCheckBox();
|
||||
@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the state of a 3-state checkbox.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns Returns wxCHK_UNCHECKED when the checkbox is unchecked,
|
||||
wxCHK_CHECKED when it is checked and
|
||||
wxCHK_UNDETERMINED when it's in the undetermined state.
|
||||
@ -109,14 +109,14 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the state of a 2-state checkbox.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns Returns @true if it is checked, @false otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetValue() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns whether or not the checkbox is a 3-state checkbox.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns Returns @true if this checkbox is a 3-state checkbox, @false if
|
||||
it's a 2-state checkbox.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns whether or not the user can set the checkbox to the third state.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns Returns @true if the user can set the third state of this
|
||||
checkbox, @false if it can only be set programmatically
|
||||
or if it's a 2-state checkbox.
|
||||
@ -141,7 +141,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the checkbox to the given state. This does not cause a
|
||||
wxEVT_COMMAND_CHECKBOX_CLICKED event to get emitted.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param state
|
||||
If @true, the check is on, otherwise it is off.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructor, creating and showing a list box.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param parent
|
||||
Parent window. Must not be @NULL.
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Checks the given item. Note that calling this method doesn't result in
|
||||
wxEVT_COMMAND_CHECKLISTBOX_TOGGLE being emitted.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param item
|
||||
Index of item to check.
|
||||
@param check
|
||||
|
@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructor, creating and showing a choice.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param parent
|
||||
Parent window. Must not be @NULL.
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Window validator.
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
Window name.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Create(), wxValidator
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxChoice();
|
||||
@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the number of columns in this choice item.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks This is implemented for Motif only and always returns 1 for the
|
||||
other platforms.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ public:
|
||||
That is, while the dropdown list is shown, it returns the currently selected
|
||||
item in it. When it is not shown, its result is the same as for the other
|
||||
function.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@wxsince{2.6.2} (before this version
|
||||
wxControlWithItems::GetSelection itself behaved like
|
||||
this).
|
||||
@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the number of columns in this choice item.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param n
|
||||
Number of columns.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ public:
|
||||
After this function has been called, the clipboard owns the data, so do not
|
||||
delete
|
||||
the data explicitly.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetData()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool AddData(wxDataObject* data);
|
||||
@ -141,7 +141,7 @@ public:
|
||||
After this function has been called, the clipboard owns the data, so do not
|
||||
delete
|
||||
the data explicitly.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see AddData()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool SetData(wxDataObject* data);
|
||||
|
@ -30,12 +30,12 @@ class wxClientDataContainer
|
||||
{
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxClientDataContainer();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
~wxClientDataContainer();
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Validator which can be used for additional date checks.
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
Control name.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if the control was successfully created or @false if
|
||||
creation failed.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if long options are enabled, otherwise @false.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see EnableLongOptions()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool AreLongOptionsEnabled() const;
|
||||
@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Enable or disable support for the long options.
|
||||
As long options are not (yet) POSIX-compliant, this option allows to disable
|
||||
them.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Customization() and AreLongOptionsEnabled()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void EnableLongOptions(bool enable = true);
|
||||
@ -219,7 +219,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Parse the command line, return 0 if ok, -1 if @c "-h" or @c "--help"
|
||||
option was encountered and the help message was given or a positive value if a
|
||||
syntax error occurred.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param giveUsage
|
||||
If @true (default), the usage message is given if a
|
||||
syntax error was encountered while parsing the command line or if help was
|
||||
@ -273,7 +273,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Give the standard usage message describing all program options. It will use the
|
||||
options and parameters descriptions specified earlier, so the resulting message
|
||||
will not be helpful to the user unless the descriptions were indeed specified.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetLogo()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Usage() const;
|
||||
|
@ -493,7 +493,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns the current print quality. This can be a positive integer, denoting the
|
||||
number of dots per inch, or
|
||||
one of the following identifiers:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
On input you should pass one of these identifiers, but on return you may get
|
||||
back a positive integer
|
||||
indicating the current resolution setting.
|
||||
@ -557,7 +557,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Sets the desired print quality. This can be a positive integer, denoting the
|
||||
number of dots per inch, or
|
||||
one of the following identifiers:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
On input you should pass one of these identifiers, but on return you may get
|
||||
back a positive integer
|
||||
indicating the current resolution setting.
|
||||
|
@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Validator which can be used for additional date checks.
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
Control name.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if the control was successfully created or @false if
|
||||
creation failed.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Invalid entries in custom colours list will be ignored on some platforms (GTK)
|
||||
or replaced with white colour on platforms where custom colours palette has
|
||||
fixed size (MSW).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxColourData
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxColourDialog(wxWindow* parent, wxColourData* data = NULL);
|
||||
|
@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Copy constructor.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param red
|
||||
The red value.
|
||||
@param green
|
||||
@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ public:
|
||||
The colour name.
|
||||
@param colour
|
||||
The colour to copy.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxColourDatabase
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxColour();
|
||||
@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
is not
|
||||
specified in flags.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@wxsince{2.7.0}
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetAsString(long flags);
|
||||
@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ public:
|
||||
and the HTML-like syntax (i.e. @c "#" followed by 6 hexadecimal digits
|
||||
for red, green, blue components).
|
||||
Returns @true if the conversion was successful, @false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@wxsince{2.7.0}
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Set(unsigned char red, unsigned char green,
|
||||
@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Assignment operator, using a colour name to be found in the colour database.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxColourDatabase
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxColour operator =(const wxColour& colour);
|
||||
|
@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
The derived class must implement this to create the popup control.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if the call succeeded, @false otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Create(wxWindow* parent);
|
||||
@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
The derived class may implement this to return adjusted size
|
||||
for the popup control, according to the variables given.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param minWidth
|
||||
Preferred minimum width.
|
||||
@param prefHeight
|
||||
@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ public:
|
||||
@param maxWidth
|
||||
Max height for window, as limited by
|
||||
screen size.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks Called each time popup is about to be shown.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxSize GetAdjustedSize(int minWidth, int prefHeight,
|
||||
@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ public:
|
||||
until the popup is shown for the first time. It is more
|
||||
efficient, but on the other hand it is often more convenient
|
||||
to have the control created immediately.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks Base implementation returns @false.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool LazyCreate();
|
||||
@ -192,7 +192,7 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructor, creating and showing a combo control.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param parent
|
||||
Parent window. Must not be @NULL.
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
@ -211,7 +211,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Window validator.
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
Window name.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Create(), wxValidator
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxComboCtrl();
|
||||
@ -233,7 +233,7 @@ public:
|
||||
This member function is not normally called in application code.
|
||||
Instead, it can be implemented in a derived class to create a
|
||||
custom popup animation.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if animation finishes before the function returns. @false
|
||||
otherwise. In the latter case you need to manually call
|
||||
DoShowPopup after the animation ends.
|
||||
@ -279,7 +279,7 @@ public:
|
||||
is properly shown after a popup animation has finished (but only
|
||||
if AnimateShow() did not finish
|
||||
the animation within it's function scope).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param rect
|
||||
Position to show the popup window at, in screen coordinates.
|
||||
@param flags
|
||||
@ -296,7 +296,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns disabled button bitmap that has been set with
|
||||
SetButtonBitmaps().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns A reference to the disabled state bitmap.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxBitmap GetBitmapDisabled() const;
|
||||
@ -304,7 +304,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns button mouse hover bitmap that has been set with
|
||||
SetButtonBitmaps().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns A reference to the mouse hover state bitmap.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxBitmap GetBitmapHover() const;
|
||||
@ -312,7 +312,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns default button bitmap that has been set with
|
||||
SetButtonBitmaps().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns A reference to the normal state bitmap.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxBitmap GetBitmapNormal() const;
|
||||
@ -320,7 +320,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns depressed button bitmap that has been set with
|
||||
SetButtonBitmaps().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns A reference to the depressed state bitmap.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxBitmap GetBitmapPressed() const;
|
||||
@ -332,7 +332,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns custom painted area in control.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetCustomPaintWidth().
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetCustomPaintWidth() const;
|
||||
@ -341,7 +341,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns features supported by wxComboCtrl. If needed feature is missing,
|
||||
you need to instead use wxGenericComboCtrl, which however may lack
|
||||
native look and feel (but otherwise sports identical API).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns Value returned is a combination of following flags:
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static int GetFeatures();
|
||||
@ -403,18 +403,18 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the popup window is in the given state.
|
||||
Possible values are:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@c Hidden()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Popup window is hidden.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@c Animating()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Popup window is being shown, but the
|
||||
popup animation has not yet finished.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@c Visible()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Popup window is fully visible.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsPopupWindowState(int state) const;
|
||||
@ -437,7 +437,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Removes the text between the two positions in the combo control text field.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param from
|
||||
The first position.
|
||||
@param to
|
||||
@ -448,7 +448,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Replaces the text between two positions with the given text, in the combo
|
||||
control text field.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param from
|
||||
The first position.
|
||||
@param to
|
||||
@ -460,7 +460,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets custom dropdown button graphics.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param bmpNormal
|
||||
Default button image.
|
||||
@param pushButtonBg
|
||||
@ -483,7 +483,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets size and position of dropdown button.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param width
|
||||
Button width. Value = 0 specifies default.
|
||||
@param height
|
||||
@ -507,7 +507,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the insertion point in the text field.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param pos
|
||||
The new insertion point.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@ -535,21 +535,21 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Extends popup size horizontally, relative to the edges of the combo control.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param extLeft
|
||||
How many pixel to extend beyond the left edge of the
|
||||
control. Default is 0.
|
||||
@param extRight
|
||||
How many pixel to extend beyond the right edge of the
|
||||
control. Default is 0.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks Popup minimum width may override arguments.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetPopupExtents(int extLeft, int extRight);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets preferred maximum height of the popup.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks Value -1 indicates the default.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetPopupMaxHeight(int height);
|
||||
@ -557,14 +557,14 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets minimum width of the popup. If wider than combo control, it will extend to
|
||||
the left.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks Value -1 indicates the default.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetPopupMinWidth(int width);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Selects the text between the two positions, in the combo control text field.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param from
|
||||
The first position.
|
||||
@param to
|
||||
|
@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructor, creating and showing a combobox.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param parent
|
||||
Parent window. Must not be @NULL.
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Window validator.
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
Window name.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Create(), wxValidator
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxComboBox();
|
||||
@ -229,7 +229,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Removes the text between the two positions in the combobox text field.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param from
|
||||
The first position.
|
||||
@param to
|
||||
@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Replaces the text between two positions with the given text, in the combobox
|
||||
text field.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param from
|
||||
The first position.
|
||||
@param to
|
||||
@ -252,7 +252,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the insertion point in the combobox text field.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param pos
|
||||
The new insertion point.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@ -265,7 +265,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Selects the text between the two positions, in the combobox text field.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param from
|
||||
The first position.
|
||||
@param to
|
||||
@ -277,7 +277,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Sets the text for the combobox text field.
|
||||
@b NB: For a combobox with @c wxCB_READONLY style the string must be in
|
||||
the combobox choices list, otherwise the call to SetValue() is ignored.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param text
|
||||
The text to set.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ public:
|
||||
)
|
||||
This is the default and only constructor of the wxConfigBase class, and
|
||||
derived classes.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param appName
|
||||
The application name. If this is empty, the class will
|
||||
normally use wxApp::GetAppName to set it. The
|
||||
@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ public:
|
||||
This parameter is only used by wxFileConfig when compiled
|
||||
in Unicode mode. It specifies the encoding in which the configuration file
|
||||
is written.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks By default, environment variable expansion is on and recording
|
||||
defaults is off.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ref ctor() wxConfigBase
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref dtor() ~wxConfigBase
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@ -136,9 +136,9 @@ public:
|
||||
config file. @e DeleteAll() is especially useful if you want to erase all
|
||||
traces of your program presence: for example, when you uninstall it.
|
||||
DeleteEntry()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
DeleteGroup()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
DeleteAll()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@ -182,19 +182,19 @@ public:
|
||||
from running several enumerations simultaneously, that's why you must pass it
|
||||
explicitly.
|
||||
Having said all this, enumerating the config entries/groups is very simple:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
There are also functions to get the number of entries/subgroups without
|
||||
actually enumerating them, but you will probably never need them.
|
||||
GetFirstGroup()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetNextGroup()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetFirstEntry()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetNextEntry()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetNumberOfEntries()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetNumberOfGroups()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@ -253,7 +253,7 @@ public:
|
||||
bool GetNextGroup(wxString& str, long& index) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
uint GetNumberOfEntries(bool bRecursive = false) const;
|
||||
|
||||
@ -309,18 +309,18 @@ public:
|
||||
Final remark: the @e szKey parameter for all these functions can contain an
|
||||
arbitrary path (either relative or absolute), not just the key name.
|
||||
Read()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Write()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Flush()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
GetAppName()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetVendorName()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFileConfig::SetUmask
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@ -330,7 +330,7 @@ public:
|
||||
first of them is the expansion of environment variables in the string values
|
||||
read from the config file: for example, if you have the following in your
|
||||
config file:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
the call to @c config-Read("UserData") will return something like
|
||||
@c "/home/zeitlin/data" if you're lucky enough to run a Linux system ;-)
|
||||
Although this feature is very useful, it may be annoying if you read a value
|
||||
@ -341,11 +341,11 @@ public:
|
||||
would be to prefix the offending symbols with a backslash.
|
||||
The following functions control this option:
|
||||
IsExpandingEnvVars()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetExpandEnvVars()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetRecordDefaults()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsRecordingDefaults()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@ -359,18 +359,18 @@ public:
|
||||
which makes it possible to use the relative paths. To clarify all this, here
|
||||
is an example (it is only for the sake of demonstration, it doesn't do anything
|
||||
sensible!):
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@e Warning: it is probably a good idea to always restore the path to its
|
||||
old value on function exit:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
because otherwise the assert in the following example will surely fail
|
||||
(we suppose here that @e foo() function is the same as above except that it
|
||||
doesn't save and restore the path):
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Finally, the path separator in wxConfigBase and derived classes is always '/',
|
||||
regardless of the platform (i.e. it is @b not '\\' under Windows).
|
||||
SetPath()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetPath()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@ -382,22 +382,22 @@ public:
|
||||
returning @true if the value was found.
|
||||
If the value was not found, @a defaultVal is used instead.
|
||||
bool Read(const wxStringkey, T* value) const;
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b Read(key, default="")
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Returns a string
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b ReadInt(key, default=0)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Returns an integer
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b ReadFloat(key, default=0.0)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Returns a floating point number
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b ReadBool(key, default=0)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Returns a boolean
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Read(const wxString& key, wxString* str) const;
|
||||
@ -453,7 +453,7 @@ public:
|
||||
the new name already exists or because the function is not supported in this
|
||||
wxConfig implementation.
|
||||
RenameEntry()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
RenameGroup()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@ -526,22 +526,22 @@ public:
|
||||
in it. For example wxFontMapper or Unix version
|
||||
of wxFileDialog have the ability to use wxConfig class.
|
||||
Set()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Get()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Create()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
DontCreateOnDemand()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
HasGroup()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
HasEntry()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Exists()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetEntryType()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@ -551,22 +551,22 @@ public:
|
||||
These functions write the specified value to the config file and return @true
|
||||
on success. In the last one, function wxToString() must be
|
||||
defined for type @e T.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b Write(key, value)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Writes a string
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b WriteInt(key, value)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Writes an integer
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b WriteFloat(key, value)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Writes a floating point number
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b WriteBool(key, value)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Writes a boolean
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Write(const wxString& key, const wxString& value);
|
||||
|
@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ public:
|
||||
the latter if the help doesn't depend on the position.
|
||||
Returns @true if help was shown, or @false if no help was available for this
|
||||
window.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param window
|
||||
Window to show help text for.
|
||||
@param point
|
||||
@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructor, creating and showing a context help button.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param parent
|
||||
Parent window. Must not be @NULL.
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
|
@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Appends several items at once to the control. Notice that calling this method
|
||||
is usually much faster than appending them one by one if you need to add a lot
|
||||
of items.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param item
|
||||
String to add.
|
||||
@param stringsArray
|
||||
@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Number of items in the strings array.
|
||||
@param clientData
|
||||
Array of client data pointers of size n to associate with the new items.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns When appending a single item, the return value is the index of
|
||||
the newly added item which may be different from the
|
||||
last one if the control is sorted (e.g. has wxLB_SORT
|
||||
@ -86,22 +86,22 @@ public:
|
||||
Note that it is an error (signalled by an assert failure in debug builds) to
|
||||
remove an item with the index negative or greater or equal than the number of
|
||||
items in the control.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param n
|
||||
The zero-based item index.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Clear()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Delete(unsigned int n);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Finds an item whose label matches the given string.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param string
|
||||
String to find.
|
||||
@param caseSensitive
|
||||
Whether search is case sensitive (default is not).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns The zero-based position of the item, or wxNOT_FOUND if the
|
||||
string was not found.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@ -113,10 +113,10 @@ public:
|
||||
It is an error to call this function for a control which doesn't have untyped
|
||||
client data at all although it is ok to call it even if the given item doesn't
|
||||
have any client data associated with it (but other items do).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param n
|
||||
The zero-based position of the item.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns A pointer to the client data, or @NULL if not present.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void* GetClientData(unsigned int n) const;
|
||||
@ -126,17 +126,17 @@ public:
|
||||
It is an error to call this function for a control which doesn't have typed
|
||||
client data at all although it is ok to call it even if the given item doesn't
|
||||
have any client data associated with it (but other items do).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param n
|
||||
The zero-based position of the item.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns A pointer to the client data, or @NULL if not present.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxClientData* GetClientObject(unsigned int n) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the number of items in the control.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see IsEmpty()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
unsigned int GetCount() const;
|
||||
@ -144,23 +144,23 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the index of the selected item or @c wxNOT_FOUND if no item is
|
||||
selected.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns The position of the current selection.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks This method can be used with single selection list boxes only,
|
||||
you should use wxListBox::GetSelections for the list
|
||||
boxes with wxLB_MULTIPLE style.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetSelection(), GetStringSelection()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetSelection() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the label of the item with the given index.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param n
|
||||
The zero-based index.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns The label of the item or an empty string if the position was
|
||||
invalid.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the label of the selected item or an empty string if no item is
|
||||
selected.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetSelection()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetStringSelection() const;
|
||||
@ -185,7 +185,7 @@ public:
|
||||
is usually much faster than inserting them one by one if you need to insert a
|
||||
lot
|
||||
of items.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param item
|
||||
String to add.
|
||||
@param pos
|
||||
@ -198,7 +198,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Number of items in the strings array.
|
||||
@param clientData
|
||||
Array of client data pointers of size n to associate with the new items.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns The return value is the index of the newly inserted item. If the
|
||||
insertion failed for some reason, -1 is returned.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@ -221,7 +221,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the control is empty or @false if it has some items.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetCount()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsEmpty() const;
|
||||
@ -238,7 +238,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Replaces the current control contents with the given items. Notice that calling
|
||||
this method is much faster than appending the items one by one if you need to
|
||||
append a lot of them.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param item
|
||||
The single item to insert into the control.
|
||||
@param stringsArray
|
||||
@ -250,7 +250,7 @@ public:
|
||||
'strings'.
|
||||
@param clientData
|
||||
Client data to associate with the item(s).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns When the control is sorted (e.g. has wxLB_SORT or wxCB_SORT
|
||||
style) the return value could be different from
|
||||
(GetCount() - 1). When setting a single item to the
|
||||
@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Associates the given untyped client data pointer with the given item. Note that
|
||||
it is an error to call this function if any typed client data pointers had been
|
||||
associated with the control items before.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param n
|
||||
The zero-based item index.
|
||||
@param data
|
||||
@ -289,7 +289,7 @@ public:
|
||||
control itself is destroyed).
|
||||
Note that it is an error to call this function if any untyped client data
|
||||
pointers had been associated with the control items before.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param n
|
||||
The zero-based item index.
|
||||
@param data
|
||||
@ -302,17 +302,17 @@ public:
|
||||
if @a n == @c wxNOT_FOUND.
|
||||
Note that this does not cause any command events to be emitted nor does it
|
||||
deselect any other items in the controls which support multiple selections.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param n
|
||||
The string position to select, starting from zero.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetString(), SetStringSelection()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetSelection(int n);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the label for the given item.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param n
|
||||
The zero-based item index.
|
||||
@param string
|
||||
@ -323,10 +323,10 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Selects the item with the specified string in the control. This doesn't cause
|
||||
any command events to be emitted.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param string
|
||||
The string to select.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if the specified string has been selected, @false if it
|
||||
wasn't found in the control.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Copy constructor, uses @ref overview_trefcount "reference counting".
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param bits
|
||||
An array of bits.
|
||||
@param maskBits
|
||||
@ -58,370 +58,370 @@ public:
|
||||
it defaults to wxBITMAP_TYPE_CUR_RESOURCE. Under MacOS, it defaults to
|
||||
wxBITMAP_TYPE_MACCURSOR_RESOURCE.
|
||||
Under X, the permitted cursor types are:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxBITMAP_TYPE_XBM
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Load an X bitmap file.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Under Windows, the permitted types are:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxBITMAP_TYPE_CUR
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Load a cursor from a .cur cursor file (only if USE_RESOURCE_LOADING_IN_MSW
|
||||
is enabled in setup.h).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxBITMAP_TYPE_CUR_RESOURCE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Load a Windows resource (as specified in the .rc file).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxBITMAP_TYPE_ICO
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Load a cursor from a .ico icon file (only if USE_RESOURCE_LOADING_IN_MSW
|
||||
is enabled in setup.h). Specify hotSpotX and hotSpotY.
|
||||
@param cursorId
|
||||
A stock cursor identifier. May be one of:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_ARROW
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A standard arrow cursor.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_RIGHT_ARROW
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A standard arrow cursor
|
||||
pointing to the right.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_BLANK
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Transparent cursor.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_BULLSEYE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Bullseye cursor.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_CHAR
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Rectangular character cursor.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_CROSS
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A cross cursor.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_HAND
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A hand cursor.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_IBEAM
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
An I-beam cursor (vertical line).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_LEFT_BUTTON
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Represents a mouse with the left button depressed.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_MAGNIFIER
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A magnifier icon.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_MIDDLE_BUTTON
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Represents a mouse with the middle button depressed.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_NO_ENTRY
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A no-entry sign cursor.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_PAINT_BRUSH
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A paintbrush cursor.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_PENCIL
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A pencil cursor.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_POINT_LEFT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A cursor that points left.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_POINT_RIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A cursor that points right.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_QUESTION_ARROW
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
An arrow and question mark.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_RIGHT_BUTTON
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Represents a mouse with the right button depressed.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_SIZENESW
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A sizing cursor pointing NE-SW.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_SIZENS
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A sizing cursor pointing N-S.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_SIZENWSE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A sizing cursor pointing NW-SE.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_SIZEWE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A sizing cursor pointing W-E.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_SIZING
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A general sizing cursor.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_SPRAYCAN
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A spraycan cursor.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_WAIT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A wait cursor.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_WATCH
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A watch cursor.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_ARROWWAIT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A cursor with both an arrow and
|
||||
an hourglass, (windows.)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Note that not all cursors are available on all platforms.
|
||||
@param cursor
|
||||
Pointer or reference to a cursor to copy.
|
||||
|
@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ class wxDataViewEvent : public wxNotifyEvent
|
||||
public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDataViewEvent(wxEventType commandType = wxEVT_NULL,
|
||||
int winid = 0);
|
||||
@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ public:
|
||||
const wxVariant GetValue() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetColumn(int col);
|
||||
|
||||
@ -117,12 +117,12 @@ public:
|
||||
void SetDataViewColumn(wxDataViewColumn* col);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetModel(wxDataViewModel* model);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetValue(const wxVariant& value);
|
||||
};
|
||||
@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ class wxDataViewIconTextRenderer : public wxDataViewRenderer
|
||||
{
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDataViewIconTextRenderer(const wxString& varianttype = "wxDataViewIconText",
|
||||
wxDataViewCellMode mode = wxDATAVIEW_CELL_INERT);
|
||||
@ -584,7 +584,7 @@ public:
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual bool Activate( wxRect cell,
|
||||
wxDataViewModel* model,
|
||||
const wxDataViewItem & item,
|
||||
const wxDataViewItem & item,
|
||||
unsigned int col );
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -626,7 +626,7 @@ public:
|
||||
virtual bool LeftClick( wxPoint cursor,
|
||||
wxRect cell,
|
||||
wxDataViewModel * model,
|
||||
const wxDataViewItem & item,
|
||||
const wxDataViewItem & item,
|
||||
unsigned int col );
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -651,7 +651,7 @@ public:
|
||||
virtual bool RightClick(wxPoint cursor,
|
||||
wxRect cell,
|
||||
wxDataViewModel* model,
|
||||
const wxDataViewItem & item,
|
||||
const wxDataViewItem & item,
|
||||
unsigned int col);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -659,7 +659,7 @@ public:
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual bool StartDrag(wxPoint cursor, wxRect cell,
|
||||
wxDataViewModel* model,
|
||||
const wxDataViewItem & item,
|
||||
const wxDataViewItem & item,
|
||||
unsigned int col);
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
@ -678,7 +678,7 @@ class wxDataViewBitmapRenderer : public wxDataViewRenderer
|
||||
{
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDataViewBitmapRenderer(const wxString& varianttype = "wxBitmap",
|
||||
wxDataViewCellMode mode = wxDATAVIEW_CELL_INERT);
|
||||
@ -756,7 +756,7 @@ class wxDataViewItem
|
||||
public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDataViewItem(void* id = NULL);
|
||||
wxDataViewItem(const wxDataViewItem& item);
|
||||
@ -1344,7 +1344,7 @@ class wxDataViewTextRenderer : public wxDataViewRenderer
|
||||
{
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDataViewTextRenderer(const wxString& varianttype = "string",
|
||||
wxDataViewCellMode mode = wxDATAVIEW_CELL_INERT);
|
||||
@ -1365,7 +1365,7 @@ class wxDataViewProgressRenderer : public wxDataViewRenderer
|
||||
{
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDataViewProgressRenderer(const wxString& label = wxEmptyString,
|
||||
const wxString& varianttype = "long",
|
||||
@ -1412,7 +1412,7 @@ class wxDataViewToggleRenderer : public wxDataViewRenderer
|
||||
{
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDataViewToggleRenderer(const wxString& varianttype = "bool",
|
||||
wxDataViewCellMode mode = wxDATAVIEW_CELL_INERT);
|
||||
@ -1456,7 +1456,7 @@ public:
|
||||
~wxDataViewTreeCtrl();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDataViewItem AppendContainer(const wxDataViewItem& parent,
|
||||
const wxString& text,
|
||||
@ -1465,7 +1465,7 @@ public:
|
||||
wxClientData* data = NULL);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDataViewItem AppendItem(const wxDataViewItem& parent,
|
||||
const wxString& text,
|
||||
@ -1769,7 +1769,7 @@ class wxDataViewDateRenderer : public wxDataViewRenderer
|
||||
{
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDataViewDateRenderer(const wxString& varianttype = "datetime",
|
||||
wxDataViewCellMode mode = wxDATAVIEW_CELL_ACTIVATABLE);
|
||||
@ -1795,7 +1795,7 @@ class wxDataViewTextRendererAttr : public wxDataViewTextRenderer
|
||||
{
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDataViewTextRendererAttr(const wxString& varianttype = "string",
|
||||
wxDataViewCellMode mode = wxDATAVIEW_CELL_INERT,
|
||||
|
@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Validator which can be used for additional date checks.
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
Control name.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if the control was successfully created or @false if
|
||||
creation failed.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@ -107,14 +107,14 @@ public:
|
||||
SetRange(), returns the lower and upper
|
||||
bounds of this range. If no range is set (or only one of the bounds is set),
|
||||
@a dt1 and/or @a dt2 are set to be invalid.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param dt1
|
||||
Pointer to the object which receives the lower range limit or
|
||||
becomes invalid if it is not set. May be @NULL if the caller is not
|
||||
interested in lower limit
|
||||
@param dt2
|
||||
Same as above but for the upper limit
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @false if no range limits are currently set, @true if at least one
|
||||
bound is set.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ public:
|
||||
control. The native version always uses the current system locale.
|
||||
Sets the display format for the date in the control. See wxDateTime for the
|
||||
meaning of format strings.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks If the format parameter is invalid, the behaviour is undefined.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetFormat(const wxChar* format);
|
||||
@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Sets the valid range for the date selection. If @a dt1 is valid, it becomes
|
||||
the earliest date (inclusive) accepted by the control. If @a dt2 is valid,
|
||||
it becomes the latest possible date.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks If the current value of the control is outside of the newly set
|
||||
range bounds, the behaviour is undefined.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
@ -35,39 +35,39 @@ public:
|
||||
some more complicated calculations to find the answer are under the
|
||||
@ref overview_datetimecalculations "Calendar calculations" section.
|
||||
IsValid()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetTicks()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetCentury()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetYear()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetMonth()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetDay()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetWeekDay()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetHour()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetMinute()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetSecond()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetMillisecond()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetDayOfYear()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetWeekOfYear()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetWeekOfMonth()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetYearDay()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsWorkDay()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsGregorianDate()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetAsDOS()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@ -88,17 +88,17 @@ public:
|
||||
@ref getmodifiedjuliandaynumber() MJD or
|
||||
@ref getratadie() "Rata Die number" from it.
|
||||
@ref wxdatetimejdn() "wxDateTime(double jdn)"
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref setjdn() "Set(double jdn)"
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetJulianDayNumber()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetJDN()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetModifiedJulianDayNumber()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetMJD()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetRataDie()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@ -110,33 +110,33 @@ public:
|
||||
All (non-const) functions in this section don't modify the time part of the
|
||||
wxDateTime -- they only work with the date part of it.
|
||||
SetToWeekDayInSameWeek()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetWeekDayInSameWeek()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetToNextWeekDay()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetNextWeekDay()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetToPrevWeekDay()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetPrevWeekDay()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetToWeekDay()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref wxDateTime::getweekday2 GetWeekDay
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetToLastWeekDay()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetLastWeekDay()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetToWeekOfYear()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetToLastMonthDay()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetLastMonthDay()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetToYearDay()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetYearDay()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@ -147,49 +147,49 @@ public:
|
||||
should use IsValid() method to check that the
|
||||
values were correct as constructors can not return an error code.
|
||||
@ref wxdatetimedef() wxDateTime
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref wxdatetimetimet() wxDateTime(time_t)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref wxdatetimetm() "wxDateTime(struct tm)"
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref wxdatetimejdn() "wxDateTime(double jdn)"
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref wxdatetimetime() "wxDateTime(h, m, s, ms)"
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref wxdatetimedate() "wxDateTime(day, mon, year, h, m, s, ms)"
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetToCurrent()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref settimet() Set(time_t)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref settm() "Set(struct tm)"
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref setjdn() "Set(double jdn)"
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref settime() "Set(h, m, s, ms)"
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref setdate() "Set(day, mon, year, h, m, s, ms)"
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref setfromdos() "SetFromDOS(unsigned long ddt)"
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ResetTime()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetYear()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetMonth()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref setdate() SetDay
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetHour()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetMinute()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetSecond()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetMillisecond()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref operatoreqtimet() operator=(time_t)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref operatoreqtm() "operator=(struct tm)"
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@ -214,21 +214,21 @@ public:
|
||||
modifies the object to which it is applied. The operators -= and += are
|
||||
defined to be equivalent to the second forms of these functions.
|
||||
@ref addts() Add(wxTimeSpan)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref addds() Add(wxDateSpan)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref subtractts() Subtract(wxTimeSpan)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref subtractds() Subtract(wxDateSpan)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref subtractdt() Subtract(wxDateTime)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref addts() oparator+=(wxTimeSpan)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref addds() oparator+=(wxDateSpan)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref subtractts() oparator-=(wxTimeSpan)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref subtractds() oparator-=(wxDateSpan)
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@ -237,19 +237,19 @@ public:
|
||||
There are several function to allow date comparison. To supplement them, a few
|
||||
global operators , etc taking wxDateTime are defined.
|
||||
IsEqualTo()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsEarlierThan()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsLaterThan()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsStrictlyBetween()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsBetween()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsSameDate()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsSameTime()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsEqualUpTo()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@ -260,7 +260,7 @@ public:
|
||||
It also accepts a few wxWidgets-specific extensions: you can optionally specify
|
||||
the width of the field to follow using @c printf(3)-like syntax and the
|
||||
format specification @c %l can be used to get the number of milliseconds.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see ParseFormat()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString Format(const wxChar* format = wxDefaultDateTimeFormat,
|
||||
@ -278,7 +278,7 @@ public:
|
||||
result exactly corresponding to the ISO standard, but it can also be useful to
|
||||
use a space as seprator if a more human-readable combined date-time
|
||||
representation is needed.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see FormatISODate(), FormatISOTime(),
|
||||
ParseISOCombined()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@ -328,7 +328,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Get the beginning of DST for the given country in the given year (current one
|
||||
by default). This function suffers from limitations described in
|
||||
@ref overview_tdatedst "DST overview".
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetEndDST()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxDateTime GetBeginDST(int year = Inv_Year,
|
||||
@ -342,7 +342,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the current default country. The default country is used for DST
|
||||
calculations, for example.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetCountry()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static Country GetCountry();
|
||||
@ -360,9 +360,9 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the object having the same date component as this one but time of
|
||||
00:00:00.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@wxsince{2.8.2}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see ResetTime()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDateTime GetDateOnly() const;
|
||||
@ -381,7 +381,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the end of DST for the given country in the given year (current one by
|
||||
default).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetBeginDST()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxDateTime GetEndDST(int year = Inv_Year,
|
||||
@ -400,7 +400,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the @ref setjdn() JDN corresponding to this date. Beware
|
||||
of rounding errors!
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetModifiedJulianDayNumber()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetJulianDayNumber() const;
|
||||
@ -451,7 +451,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the full (default) or abbreviated (specify @c Name_Abbr name of the
|
||||
given month.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetWeekDayName()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxString GetMonthName(Month month,
|
||||
@ -540,7 +540,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the full (default) or abbreviated (specify @c Name_Abbr name of the
|
||||
given week day.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetMonthName()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxString GetWeekDayName(WeekDay weekday,
|
||||
@ -584,7 +584,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if IsStrictlyBetween()
|
||||
is @true or if the date is equal to one of the limit values.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see IsStrictlyBetween()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsBetween(const wxDateTime& t1, const wxDateTime& t2) const;
|
||||
@ -649,7 +649,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if this date lies strictly between the two others,
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see IsBetween()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsStrictlyBetween(const wxDateTime& t1,
|
||||
@ -695,11 +695,11 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the object corresponding to the current time.
|
||||
Example:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Note that this function is accurate up to second:
|
||||
UNow() should be used for better precision
|
||||
(but it is less efficient and might not be available on all platforms).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Today()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxDateTime Now();
|
||||
@ -861,31 +861,31 @@ public:
|
||||
additional argument of wxString::const_iterator type in which, if it is not
|
||||
@NULL, an iterator pointing to the end of the scanned string part is returned.
|
||||
ParseFormat()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ParseDateTime()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ParseDate()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ParseTime()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ParseISODate()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ParseISOTime()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ParseISOCombined()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxDateTime::ParseRfc822Date
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Format()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
FormatDate()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
FormatTime()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
FormatISOCombined()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
FormatISODate()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
FormatISOTime()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@ -910,7 +910,7 @@ public:
|
||||
calculations, date formatting and other things.
|
||||
The possible values for @a country parameter are enumerated in
|
||||
@ref overview_wxdatetime "wxDateTime constants section".
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetCountry()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static void SetCountry(Country country);
|
||||
@ -1046,43 +1046,43 @@ public:
|
||||
Please note that although several function accept an extra @e Calendar
|
||||
parameter, it is currently ignored as only the Gregorian calendar is
|
||||
supported. Future versions will support other calendars.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetCountry()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetCountry()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsWestEuropeanCountry()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetCurrentYear()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ConvertYearToBC()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetCurrentMonth()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsLeapYear()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref getcenturystatic() GetCentury
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetNumberOfDays()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetNumberOfDays()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetMonthName()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetWeekDayName()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetAmPmStrings()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsDSTApplicable()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetBeginDST()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetEndDST()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Now()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
UNow()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Today()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1097,21 +1097,21 @@ public:
|
||||
Please see the @ref overview_tdatetimezones "time zone overview" for more
|
||||
information about time zones. Normally, these functions should be rarely used.
|
||||
FromTimezone()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ToTimezone()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
MakeTimezone()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
MakeFromTimezone()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ToUTC()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
MakeUTC()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetBeginDST()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetEndDST()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsDST()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1132,7 +1132,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the object corresponding to the midnight of the current day (i.e. the
|
||||
same as Now(), but the time part is set to 0).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Now()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxDateTime Today();
|
||||
@ -1141,7 +1141,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns the object corresponding to the current time including the
|
||||
milliseconds if a function to get time with such precision is available on the
|
||||
current platform (supported under most Unices and Win32).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Now()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxDateTime UNow();
|
||||
@ -1236,14 +1236,14 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a date span object corresponding to one day.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Days()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxDateSpan Day();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a date span object corresponding to the given number of days.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Day()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxDateSpan Days(int days);
|
||||
@ -1251,7 +1251,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the number of days (only, that it not counting the weeks component!)
|
||||
in this date span.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetTotalDays()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetDays() const;
|
||||
@ -1264,14 +1264,14 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the combined number of days in this date span, counting both weeks and
|
||||
days. It still doesn't take neither months nor years into the account.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetWeeks(), GetDays()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetTotalDays() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the number of weeks in this date span.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetTotalDays()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetWeeks() const;
|
||||
@ -1283,14 +1283,14 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a date span object corresponding to one month.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Months()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxDateSpan Month();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a date span object corresponding to the given number of months.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Month()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxDateSpan Months(int mon);
|
||||
@ -1310,7 +1310,7 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Changes the sign of this date span.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Negate()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDateSpan Neg();
|
||||
@ -1319,7 +1319,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the date span with the opposite sign.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Neg()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDateSpan Negate() const;
|
||||
@ -1360,28 +1360,28 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a date span object corresponding to one week.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Weeks()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxDateSpan Week();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a date span object corresponding to the given number of weeks.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Week()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxDateSpan Weeks(int weeks);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a date span object corresponding to one year.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Years()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxDateSpan Year();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a date span object corresponding to the given number of years.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Year()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxDateSpan Years(int years);
|
||||
@ -1433,15 +1433,15 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
GetSeconds()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetMinutes()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetHours()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetDays()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetWeeks()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetValue()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1473,35 +1473,35 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the string containing the formatted representation of the time span.
|
||||
The following format specifiers are allowed after %:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
H
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
number of @b Hours
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
M
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
number of @b Minutes
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
S
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
number of @b Seconds
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
l
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
number of mi@b lliseconds
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
D
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
number of @b Days
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
E
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
number of w@b Eeks
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
%
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
the percent character
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Note that, for example, the number of hours in the description above is not
|
||||
well defined: it can be either the total number of hours (for example, for a
|
||||
time span of 50 hours this would be 50) or just the hour part of the time
|
||||
@ -1643,15 +1643,15 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Add()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Subtract()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Multiply()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Negate()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Neg()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Abs()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1668,27 +1668,27 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Milliseconds()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Millisecond()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Seconds()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Second()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Minutes()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Minute()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Hours()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Hour()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Days()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Day()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Weeks()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Week()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1704,15 +1704,15 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
IsNull()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsPositive()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsNegative()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsEqualTo()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsLongerThan()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsShorterThan()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ public:
|
||||
)
|
||||
Constructs a datastream object from an output stream. Only write methods will
|
||||
be available. The second form is only available in Unicode build of wxWidgets.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param stream
|
||||
The output stream.
|
||||
@param conv
|
||||
@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ public:
|
||||
)
|
||||
Constructs a datastream object from an input stream. Only read methods will
|
||||
be available. The second form is only available in Unicode build of wxWidgets.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param stream
|
||||
The input stream.
|
||||
@param conv
|
||||
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Copy from a source DC to this DC, specifying the destination
|
||||
coordinates, size of area to copy, source DC, source coordinates,
|
||||
logical function, whether to use a bitmap mask, and mask source position.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param xdest
|
||||
Destination device context x position.
|
||||
@param ydest
|
||||
@ -61,8 +61,8 @@ public:
|
||||
with the bitmap
|
||||
selected into the source device context. The Windows implementation does
|
||||
the following if MaskBlt cannot be used:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Creates a temporary bitmap and copies the destination area into it.
|
||||
Copies the source area into the temporary bitmap using the specified
|
||||
logical function.
|
||||
@ -75,8 +75,8 @@ public:
|
||||
and the background colour set to WHITE.
|
||||
ORs the temporary bitmap with the destination area.
|
||||
Deletes the temporary bitmap.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
This sequence of operations ensures that the source's transparent area need
|
||||
not be black,
|
||||
and logical functions are supported.
|
||||
@ -97,9 +97,9 @@ public:
|
||||
and ysrc
|
||||
will be assumed for the mask source position. Currently only implemented on
|
||||
Windows.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks There is partial support for Blit in wxPostScriptDC, under X.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see StretchBlit(), wxMemoryDC, wxBitmap, wxMask
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Blit(wxCoord xdest, wxCoord ydest, wxCoord width,
|
||||
@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Adds the specified point to the bounding box which can be retrieved with
|
||||
MinX(), MaxX() and
|
||||
MinY(), MaxY() functions.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see ResetBoundingBox()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void CalcBoundingBox(wxCoord x, wxCoord y);
|
||||
@ -207,7 +207,7 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Draws a circle with the given centre and radius.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see DrawEllipse()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void DrawCircle(wxCoord x, wxCoord y, wxCoord radius);
|
||||
@ -219,7 +219,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Draws an ellipse contained in the rectangle specified either with the given top
|
||||
left corner and the given size or directly. The current pen is used for the
|
||||
outline and the current brush for filling the shape.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see DrawCircle()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void DrawEllipse(wxCoord x, wxCoord y, wxCoord width,
|
||||
@ -358,7 +358,7 @@ public:
|
||||
particular, a font different from @c wxNORMAL_FONT should be used as the
|
||||
latter is not a TrueType font. @c wxSWISS_FONT is an example of a font
|
||||
which is.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see DrawText()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void DrawRotatedText(const wxString& text, wxCoord x, wxCoord y,
|
||||
@ -438,7 +438,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the current background mode: @c wxSOLID or @c wxTRANSPARENT.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetBackgroundMode()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetBackgroundMode() const;
|
||||
@ -466,7 +466,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the depth (number of bits/pixel) of this DC.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxDisplayDepth()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetDepth() const;
|
||||
@ -485,7 +485,7 @@ public:
|
||||
is supported, the return value will either be @c wxLayout_LeftToRight or
|
||||
@c wxLayout_RightToLeft. If RTL layout is not supported, the return value will
|
||||
be @c wxLayout_Default.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetLayoutDirection()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxLayoutDirection GetLayoutDirection() const;
|
||||
@ -510,7 +510,7 @@ public:
|
||||
If the optional parameter @a font is specified and valid, then it is used
|
||||
for the text extent calculation. Otherwise the currently selected font is.
|
||||
Note that this function works both with single-line and multi-line strings.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxFont, SetFont(), GetPartialTextExtents(), GetTextExtent()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void GetMultiLineTextExtent(const wxString& string, wxCoord* w,
|
||||
@ -533,7 +533,7 @@ public:
|
||||
various platforms have a native API function that is faster or more
|
||||
accurate than the generic implementation then it should be used
|
||||
instead.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetMultiLineTextExtent(), GetTextExtent()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetPartialTextExtents(const wxString& text,
|
||||
@ -559,14 +559,14 @@ public:
|
||||
represent the maximum horizontal and vertical 'pixel' values used in your
|
||||
application, the following code will scale the graphic to fit on the
|
||||
printer page:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b GetSize()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Returns a Wx::Size
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b GetSizeWH()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Returns a 2-element list
|
||||
@c ( width, height )
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@ -599,7 +599,7 @@ public:
|
||||
If the optional parameter @a font is specified and valid, then it is used
|
||||
for the text extent calculation. Otherwise the currently selected font is.
|
||||
Note that this function only works with single-line strings.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxFont, SetFont(), GetPartialTextExtents(),
|
||||
GetMultiLineTextExtent()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@ -707,7 +707,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Resets the bounding box: after a call to this function, the bounding box
|
||||
doesn't contain anything.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see CalcBoundingBox()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void ResetBoundingBox();
|
||||
@ -716,7 +716,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Sets the x and y axis orientation (i.e., the direction from lowest to
|
||||
highest values on the axis). The default orientation is
|
||||
x axis from left to right and y axis from top down.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param xLeftRight
|
||||
True to set the x axis orientation to the natural
|
||||
left to right orientation, @false to invert it.
|
||||
@ -758,7 +758,7 @@ public:
|
||||
The clipping region is an area to which drawing is restricted. Possible uses
|
||||
for the clipping region are for clipping text or for speeding up window redraws
|
||||
when only a known area of the screen is damaged.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see DestroyClippingRegion(), wxRegion
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetClippingRegion(wxCoord x, wxCoord y, wxCoord width,
|
||||
@ -786,7 +786,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the current layout direction for the device context. @a dir may be either
|
||||
@c wxLayout_Default, @c wxLayout_LeftToRight or @c wxLayout_RightToLeft.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetLayoutDirection()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetLayoutDirection(wxLayoutDirection dir);
|
||||
@ -799,7 +799,7 @@ public:
|
||||
The possible values
|
||||
and their meaning in terms of source and destination pixel values are
|
||||
as follows:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The default is wxCOPY, which simply draws with the current colour.
|
||||
The others combine the current colour and the background using a
|
||||
logical operation. wxINVERT is commonly used for drawing rubber bands or
|
||||
@ -819,26 +819,26 @@ public:
|
||||
Drawing to a Windows printer device context uses the current mapping mode,
|
||||
but mapping mode is currently ignored for PostScript output.
|
||||
The mapping mode can be one of the following:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxMM_TWIPS
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Each logical unit is 1/20 of a point, or 1/1440 of
|
||||
an inch.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxMM_POINTS
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Each logical unit is a point, or 1/72 of an inch.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxMM_METRIC
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Each logical unit is 1 mm.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxMM_LOMETRIC
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Each logical unit is 1/10 of a mm.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxMM_TEXT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Each logical unit is 1 device pixel.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetMapMode(int int);
|
||||
@ -896,7 +896,7 @@ public:
|
||||
coordinates, destination size, source DC, source coordinates,
|
||||
size of source area to copy, logical function, whether to use a bitmap mask,
|
||||
and mask source position.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param xdest
|
||||
Destination device context x position.
|
||||
@param ydest
|
||||
@ -922,8 +922,8 @@ public:
|
||||
with the bitmap
|
||||
selected into the source device context. The Windows implementation does
|
||||
the following if MaskBlt cannot be used:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Creates a temporary bitmap and copies the destination area into it.
|
||||
Copies the source area into the temporary bitmap using the specified
|
||||
logical function.
|
||||
@ -936,8 +936,8 @@ public:
|
||||
and the background colour set to WHITE.
|
||||
ORs the temporary bitmap with the destination area.
|
||||
Deletes the temporary bitmap.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
This sequence of operations ensures that the source's transparent area need
|
||||
not be black,
|
||||
and logical functions are supported.
|
||||
@ -958,7 +958,7 @@ public:
|
||||
and ysrc
|
||||
will be assumed for the mask source position. Currently only implemented on
|
||||
Windows.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks There is partial support for Blit in wxPostScriptDC, under X.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool StretchBlit(wxCoord xdest, wxCoord ydest, wxCoord dstWidth,
|
||||
|
@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Init() methods later in order to use the object.
|
||||
The other constructors initialize the object immediately and @c Init()
|
||||
must not be called after using them.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param dc
|
||||
The underlying DC: everything drawn to this object will be
|
||||
flushed to this DC when this object is destroyed. You may pass @NULL
|
||||
|
@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Also, before using the updated bitmap data, make sure to select it out of
|
||||
context first
|
||||
(for example by selecting wxNullBitmap into the device context).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxDC::DrawBitmap
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SelectObject(wxBitmap& bitmap);
|
||||
|
@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ public:
|
||||
You might use this pair of functions when implementing a drag feature, for
|
||||
example
|
||||
as in the wxSplitterWindow implementation.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks This function is probably obsolete since the X implementations
|
||||
allow drawing directly on the screen now. However, the
|
||||
fact that this function allows the screen to be
|
||||
|
@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Draws a circle with the given centre and radius.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxDC::DrawEllipse
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void DrawCircle(wxCoord x, wxCoord y, wxCoord radius);
|
||||
@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Draws an ellipse contained in the rectangle specified either with the given top
|
||||
left corner and the given size or directly. The current pen is used for the
|
||||
outline and the current brush for filling the shape.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxDC::DrawCircle
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void DrawEllipse(wxCoord x, wxCoord y, wxCoord width,
|
||||
@ -339,7 +339,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the current background mode: @c wxSOLID or @c wxTRANSPARENT.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxDC::SetBackgroundMode
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetBackgroundMode() const;
|
||||
@ -500,7 +500,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Resets the bounding box: after a call to this function, the bounding box
|
||||
doesn't contain anything.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxDC::CalcBoundingBox
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void ResetBoundingBox();
|
||||
@ -509,7 +509,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Sets the x and y axis orientation (i.e., the direction from lowest to
|
||||
highest values on the axis). The default orientation is the natural
|
||||
orientation, e.g. x axis from left to right and y axis from bottom up.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param xLeftRight
|
||||
True to set the x axis orientation to the natural
|
||||
left to right orientation, @false to invert it.
|
||||
@ -586,26 +586,26 @@ public:
|
||||
uses the current mapping mode, but mapping mode is currently ignored for
|
||||
PostScript output.
|
||||
The mapping mode can be one of the following:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxMM_TWIPS
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Each logical unit is 1/20 of a point, or 1/1440 of
|
||||
an inch.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxMM_POINTS
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Each logical unit is a point, or 1/72 of an inch.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxMM_METRIC
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Each logical unit is 1 mm.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxMM_LOMETRIC
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Each logical unit is 1/10 of a mm.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxMM_TEXT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Each logical unit is 1 pixel.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetMapMode(int int);
|
||||
|
@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructor.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param parent
|
||||
Can be @NULL, a frame or another dialog box.
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Used to associate a name with the window,
|
||||
allowing the application user to set Motif resource values for
|
||||
individual dialog boxes.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Create()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDialog();
|
||||
@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Centres the dialog box on the display.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param direction
|
||||
May be wxHORIZONTAL, wxVERTICAL or wxBOTH.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@ -200,10 +200,10 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Ends a modal dialog, passing a value to be returned from the ShowModal()
|
||||
invocation.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param retCode
|
||||
The value that should be returned by ShowModal.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see ShowModal(), GetReturnCode(), SetReturnCode()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void EndModal(int retCode);
|
||||
@ -211,7 +211,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the identifier of the button which works like standard OK button in this
|
||||
dialog.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetAffirmativeId()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetAffirmativeId() const;
|
||||
@ -229,7 +229,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the identifier of the button to map presses of @c ESC
|
||||
button to.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetEscapeId()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetEscapeId() const;
|
||||
@ -276,10 +276,10 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the return code for this window.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks A return code is normally associated with a modal dialog, where
|
||||
ShowModal() returns a code to the application.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetReturnCode(), ShowModal(), EndModal()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetReturnCode();
|
||||
@ -295,10 +295,10 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Iconizes or restores the dialog. Windows only.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param iconize
|
||||
If @true, iconizes the dialog box; if @false, shows and restores it.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks Note that in Windows, iconization has no effect since dialog
|
||||
boxes cannot be iconized. However, applications may
|
||||
need to explicitly restore dialog boxes under Motif
|
||||
@ -310,7 +310,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the dialog box is iconized. Windows only.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks Always returns @false under Windows since dialogs cannot be
|
||||
iconized.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@ -339,10 +339,10 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
The default handler for wxEVT_SYS_COLOUR_CHANGED.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param event
|
||||
The colour change event.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks Changes the dialog's colour to conform to the current settings
|
||||
(Windows only). Add an event table entry for your
|
||||
dialog class if you wish the behaviour to be different
|
||||
@ -350,7 +350,7 @@ public:
|
||||
you do override this function, call wxEvent::Skip to
|
||||
propagate the notification to child windows and
|
||||
controls.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxSysColourChangedEvent
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void OnSysColourChanged(wxSysColourChangedEvent& event);
|
||||
@ -365,7 +365,7 @@ public:
|
||||
the special OK button in the PocketPC title bar, an event with this id is
|
||||
generated.
|
||||
By default, the affirmative id is wxID_OK.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetAffirmativeId(), SetEscapeId()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetAffirmativeId(int id);
|
||||
@ -387,7 +387,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the icon for this dialog.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param icon
|
||||
The icon to associate with this dialog.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@ -395,7 +395,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the icons for this dialog.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param icons
|
||||
The icons to associate with this dialog.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@ -422,7 +422,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the adaptation mode, overriding the global adaptation flag. @a mode may be
|
||||
one of the following values:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
See also @ref overview_autoscrollingdialogs "Automatic scrolling dialogs" for
|
||||
more on layout adaptation.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@ -443,7 +443,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Allows the programmer to specify whether the dialog box is modal (Show() blocks
|
||||
control
|
||||
until the dialog is hidden) or modeless (control returns immediately).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param flag
|
||||
If @true, the dialog will be modal, otherwise it will be modeless.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@ -451,26 +451,26 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the return code for this window.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param retCode
|
||||
The integer return code, usually a control identifier.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks A return code is normally associated with a modal dialog, where
|
||||
ShowModal() returns a code to the application.
|
||||
The function EndModal() calls SetReturnCode.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetReturnCode(), ShowModal(), EndModal()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetReturnCode(int retCode);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Hides or shows the dialog.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param show
|
||||
If @true, the dialog box is shown and brought to the front;
|
||||
otherwise the box is hidden. If @false and the dialog is
|
||||
modal, control is returned to the calling program.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks The preferred way of dismissing a modal dialog is to use
|
||||
EndModal().
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@ -480,7 +480,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Shows a modal dialog. Program flow does not return until the dialog has been
|
||||
dismissed with
|
||||
EndModal().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns The return value is the value set with SetReturnCode().
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int ShowModal();
|
||||
|
@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Cancel dialing the number initiated with Dial()
|
||||
with async parameter equal to @true.
|
||||
Note that this won't result in DISCONNECTED event being sent.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see IsDialing()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool CancelDialing();
|
||||
@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if (async) dialing is in progress.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Dial()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsDialing() const;
|
||||
@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ public:
|
||||
so, in general, the user should be allowed to override it. This function
|
||||
allows to forcefully set the online status - whatever our internal
|
||||
algorithm may think about it.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see IsOnline()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetOnlineStatus(bool isOnline = true);
|
||||
|
@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Main constructor.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param parent
|
||||
Parent window.
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
|
@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructor. Use ShowModal() to show
|
||||
the dialog.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param parent
|
||||
Parent window.
|
||||
@param message
|
||||
|
@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ class wxDisplay
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructor, setting up a wxDisplay instance with the specified display.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param index
|
||||
The index of the display to use. This must be non-negative
|
||||
and lower than the value returned by GetCount().
|
||||
@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the index of the display on which the given point lies. Returns
|
||||
@c wxNOT_FOUND if the point is not on any connected display.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param pt
|
||||
The point to locate.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ public:
|
||||
If the window is on more than one display it gets the display that overlaps the
|
||||
window the most.
|
||||
Returns @c wxNOT_FOUND if the window is not on any connected display.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param win
|
||||
The window to locate.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Override this function to receive dropped text.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param x
|
||||
The x coordinate of the mouse.
|
||||
@param y
|
||||
@ -108,14 +108,14 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Called when the mouse is being dragged over the drop target. By default,
|
||||
this calls functions return the suggested return value @e def.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param x
|
||||
The x coordinate of the mouse.
|
||||
@param y
|
||||
The y coordinate of the mouse.
|
||||
@param def
|
||||
Suggested value for return value. Determined by SHIFT or CONTROL key states.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns Returns the desired operation or wxDragNone. This is used for
|
||||
optical feedback from the side of the drop source,
|
||||
typically in form of changing the icon.
|
||||
@ -126,12 +126,12 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Called when the user drops a data object on the target. Return @false to veto
|
||||
the operation.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param x
|
||||
The x coordinate of the mouse.
|
||||
@param y
|
||||
The y coordinate of the mouse.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns Return @true to accept the data, @false to veto the operation.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual bool OnDrop(wxCoord x, wxCoord y);
|
||||
@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Called when the mouse enters the drop target. By default, this calls
|
||||
OnDragOver().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param x
|
||||
The x coordinate of the mouse.
|
||||
@param y
|
||||
@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ public:
|
||||
@param def
|
||||
Suggested default for return value. Determined by SHIFT or CONTROL key
|
||||
states.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns Returns the desired operation or wxDragNone. This is used for
|
||||
optical feedback from the side of the drop source,
|
||||
typically in form of changing the icon.
|
||||
@ -195,7 +195,7 @@ public:
|
||||
between wxMSW and wxGTK: these are cursors under Windows but icons for GTK.
|
||||
You should use the macro wxDROP_ICON() in portable
|
||||
programs instead of directly using either of these types.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param win
|
||||
The window which initiates the drag and drop operation.
|
||||
@param iconCopy
|
||||
@ -216,7 +216,7 @@ public:
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
~wxDropSource();
|
||||
|
||||
@ -224,13 +224,13 @@ public:
|
||||
Do it (call this in response to a mouse button press, for example). This starts
|
||||
the drag-and-drop operation which will terminate when the user releases the
|
||||
mouse.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param flags
|
||||
If wxDrag_AllowMove is included in the flags, data may
|
||||
be moved and not only copied (default). If wxDrag_DefaultMove is
|
||||
specified (which includes the previous flag), this is even the default
|
||||
operation
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns Returns the operation requested by the user, may be wxDragCopy,
|
||||
wxDragMove, wxDragLink, wxDragCancel or wxDragNone if
|
||||
an error occurred.
|
||||
@ -248,13 +248,13 @@ public:
|
||||
in this function. It is called on each mouse move, so your implementation must
|
||||
not be too
|
||||
slow.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param effect
|
||||
The effect to implement. One of wxDragCopy, wxDragMove, wxDragLink and
|
||||
wxDragNone.
|
||||
@param scrolling
|
||||
@true if the window is scrolling. MSW only.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns Return @false if you want default feedback, or @true if you
|
||||
implement your own feedback. The return values is
|
||||
ignored under GTK.
|
||||
@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Set the icon to use for a certain drag result.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param res
|
||||
The drag result to set the icon for.
|
||||
@param cursor
|
||||
@ -308,7 +308,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Override this function to receive dropped files.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param x
|
||||
The x coordinate of the mouse.
|
||||
@param y
|
||||
|
@ -52,23 +52,23 @@ public:
|
||||
wxTEMPLATE_VISIBLE The template may be displayed to the user in dialogs.
|
||||
wxTEMPLATE_INVISIBLE The template may not be displayed to the user in dialogs.
|
||||
wxDEFAULT_TEMPLATE_FLAGS Defined as wxTEMPLATE_VISIBLE.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b Wx::DocTemplate-new( docmgr, descr, filter, dir,
|
||||
ext, docTypeName, viewTypeName, docClassInfo, viewClassInfo, flags
|
||||
)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
will construct document and view objects from the class information
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b Wx::DocTemplate-new( docmgr, descr, filter, dir,
|
||||
ext, docTypeName, viewTypeName, docClassName, viewClassName, flags
|
||||
)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
will construct document and view objects from perl packages
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b Wx::DocTemplate-new( docmgr, descr, filter, dir,
|
||||
ext, docTypeName, viewTypeName )
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@c Wx::DocTemplate::CreateDocument() and
|
||||
@c Wx::DocTemplate::CreateView() must be overridden
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@ -367,7 +367,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Loads the file history from a config object.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxConfig()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void FileHistoryLoad(wxConfigBase& config);
|
||||
@ -381,7 +381,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Saves the file history into a config object. This must be called
|
||||
explicitly by the application.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxConfig()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void FileHistorySave(wxConfigBase& resourceFile);
|
||||
@ -533,7 +533,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns a document template by asking the user (if there is more than one
|
||||
template).
|
||||
This function is used in CreateDocument().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param templates
|
||||
Pointer to an array of templates from which to choose a desired template.
|
||||
@param noTemplates
|
||||
@ -542,7 +542,7 @@ public:
|
||||
If more than one template is passed in in templates,
|
||||
then this parameter indicates whether the list of templates that the user
|
||||
will have to choose from is sorted or not when shown the choice box dialog.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Default is @false.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDocTemplate* SelectDocumentType(wxDocTemplate** templates,
|
||||
@ -556,7 +556,7 @@ public:
|
||||
The dialog normally will not appear because the array of templates only contains
|
||||
those relevant to the document in question, and often there will only be one
|
||||
such.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param templates
|
||||
Pointer to an array of templates from which to choose a desired template.
|
||||
@param noTemplates
|
||||
@ -565,7 +565,7 @@ public:
|
||||
If more than one template is passed in in templates,
|
||||
then this parameter indicates whether the list of templates that the user
|
||||
will have to choose from is sorted or not when shown the choice box dialog.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Default is @false.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDocTemplate* SelectViewType(wxDocTemplate** templates,
|
||||
@ -1372,7 +1372,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the list of menus that are managed by this file history object.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see UseMenu()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxList GetMenus() const;
|
||||
@ -1380,7 +1380,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Loads the file history from the given config object. This function should be
|
||||
called explicitly by the application.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxConfig()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Load(wxConfigBase& config);
|
||||
@ -1398,7 +1398,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Saves the file history into the given config object. This must be called
|
||||
explicitly by the application.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxConfig()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Save(wxConfigBase& config);
|
||||
|
@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ public:
|
||||
for
|
||||
wxGenericDragImage, and can be used when the application
|
||||
supplies DoDrawImage() and GetImageRect().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param image
|
||||
Icon or bitmap to be used as the drag image. The bitmap can
|
||||
have a mask.
|
||||
@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ public:
|
||||
and Move() to show the image on the screen.
|
||||
Call EndDrag() when the drag has finished.
|
||||
Note that this call automatically calls CaptureMouse.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param hotspot
|
||||
The location of the drag position relative to the upper-left corner
|
||||
of the image.
|
||||
|
@ -192,15 +192,15 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
wxArray::Add
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxArray::AddAt
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxArray::Insert
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxArray::SetCount
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
WX_APPEND_ARRAY()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
WX_PREPEND_ARRAY()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@ -230,9 +230,9 @@ public:
|
||||
never use wxBaseArray anyhow it shouldn't be a problem) and that you should not
|
||||
derive your own classes from the array classes.
|
||||
@ref wxArray::ctordef "wxArray default constructor"
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref wxArray::ctorcopy "wxArray copy constructors and assignment operators"
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref wxArray::dtor ~wxArray
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@ -349,25 +349,25 @@ public:
|
||||
WX_DECLARE_OBJARRAY macros and must be fully declared before you use
|
||||
WX_DEFINE_OBJARRAY macro.
|
||||
WX_DEFINE_ARRAY()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
WX_DEFINE_EXPORTED_ARRAY()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
WX_DEFINE_USER_EXPORTED_ARRAY()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
WX_DEFINE_SORTED_ARRAY()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
WX_DEFINE_SORTED_EXPORTED_ARRAY()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
WX_DEFINE_SORTED_USER_EXPORTED_ARRAY()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
WX_DECLARE_EXPORTED_OBJARRAY()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
WX_DECLARE_USER_EXPORTED_OBJARRAY()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
WX_DEFINE_OBJARRAY()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
WX_DEFINE_EXPORTED_OBJARRAY()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
WX_DEFINE_USER_EXPORTED_OBJARRAY()
|
||||
To slightly complicate the matters even further, the operator - defined by
|
||||
default for the array iterators by these macros only makes sense if the array
|
||||
@ -375,33 +375,33 @@ public:
|
||||
provokes warnings from some compilers and to avoid them you should use the
|
||||
@c _PTR versions of the macros above. For example, to define an array of
|
||||
pointers to @c double you should use:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Note that the above macros are generally only useful for
|
||||
wxObject types. There are separate macros for declaring an array of a simple
|
||||
type,
|
||||
such as an int.
|
||||
The following simple types are supported:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
int
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
long
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
size_t
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
double
|
||||
To create an array of a simple type, simply append the type you want in CAPS to
|
||||
the array definition.
|
||||
For example, for an integer array, you'd use one of the following variants:
|
||||
WX_DEFINE_ARRAY_INT()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
WX_DEFINE_EXPORTED_ARRAY_INT()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
WX_DEFINE_USER_EXPORTED_ARRAY_INT()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
WX_DEFINE_SORTED_ARRAY_INT()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
WX_DEFINE_SORTED_EXPORTED_ARRAY_INT()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
WX_DEFINE_SORTED_USER_EXPORTED_ARRAY_INT()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@ -420,7 +420,7 @@ public:
|
||||
going to put in the array and will prevent the array code from reallocating the
|
||||
memory more times than needed.
|
||||
wxArray::Alloc
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxArray::Shrink
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@ -430,11 +430,11 @@ public:
|
||||
retrieve them - possibly using just the C array indexing [] operator which
|
||||
does exactly the same as wxArray::Item method.
|
||||
wxArray::GetCount
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxArray::IsEmpty
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxArray::Item
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxArray::Last
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@ -447,7 +447,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Detach() if you don't want this to happen. On the
|
||||
other hand, when an object is removed from a wxArray nothing happens - you
|
||||
should delete it manually if required:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
See also WX_CLEAR_ARRAY() macro which deletes all
|
||||
elements of a wxArray (supposed to contain pointers).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@ -459,7 +459,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Detach() if you don't want this to happen. On
|
||||
the other hand, when an object is removed from a wxArray nothing happens -
|
||||
you should delete it manually if required:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
See also WX_CLEAR_ARRAY() macro which deletes all
|
||||
elements of a wxArray (supposed to contain pointers).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@ -467,22 +467,22 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
WX_CLEAR_ARRAY()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxArray::Empty
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxArray::Clear
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxArray::RemoveAt
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxArray::Remove
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
wxArray::Index
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxArray::IndexForInsert
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxArray::Sort
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@ -493,7 +493,7 @@ public:
|
||||
@e count. If the array has already @a count or more items, nothing is
|
||||
done. Otherwise, @c count - GetCount() elements are added and initialized to
|
||||
the value @e defval.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxArray::GetCount
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetCount(size_t count);
|
||||
@ -508,7 +508,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
The notation CMPFUNCT should be read as if we had the following declaration:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
where @e T is the type of the array elements. I.e. it is a function returning
|
||||
@e int which is passed two arguments of type @e T *.
|
||||
Sorts the array using the specified compare function: this function should
|
||||
@ -538,7 +538,7 @@ public:
|
||||
a DLL under Windows and array needs to be visible outside the DLL. The third is
|
||||
needed for exporting an array from a user DLL.
|
||||
Example:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
You must use WX_DEFINE_OBJARRAY() macro to define
|
||||
the array class - otherwise you would get link errors.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@ -554,7 +554,7 @@ public:
|
||||
a DLL under Windows and array needs to be visible outside the DLL. The third is
|
||||
needed for exporting an array from a user DLL.
|
||||
Example:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Note that wxWidgets predefines the following standard array classes: @b
|
||||
wxArrayInt,
|
||||
@b wxArrayLong, @b wxArrayShort, @b wxArrayDouble, @b wxArrayPtrVoid.
|
||||
@ -589,7 +589,7 @@ public:
|
||||
a DLL under Windows and array needs to be visible outside the DLL. The third is
|
||||
needed for exporting an array from a user DLL.
|
||||
Example:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
You will have to initialize the objects of this class by passing a comparison
|
||||
function to the array object constructor like this:
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
@ -24,14 +24,14 @@ class wxDynamicLibraryDetails
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Retrieves the load address and the size of this module.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param addr
|
||||
the pointer to the location to return load address in, may be
|
||||
@NULL
|
||||
@param len
|
||||
pointer to the location to return the size of this module in
|
||||
memory in, may be @NULL
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if the load address and module size were retrieved, @false
|
||||
if this information is not available.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ public:
|
||||
function name.
|
||||
Returned value will be @NULL if the symbol was not found in the DLL or if
|
||||
an error occurred.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param dllHandle
|
||||
Valid handle previously returned by
|
||||
LoadLibrary
|
||||
@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns a handle to the loaded DLL. Use @a success parameter to test if it
|
||||
is valid. If the handle is valid, the library must be unloaded later with
|
||||
UnloadLibrary().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param libname
|
||||
Name of the shared object to load.
|
||||
@param success
|
||||
@ -218,16 +218,16 @@ public:
|
||||
it adds a @c ".dll" extension under Windows and @c "lib" prefix and
|
||||
@c ".so", @c ".sl" or maybe @c ".dylib" extension under Unix.
|
||||
The possible values for @a cat are:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxDL_LIBRARY
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
normal library
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxDL_MODULE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
a loadable module or plugin
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see CanonicalizePluginName()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxString CanonicalizeName(const wxString& name,
|
||||
@ -240,14 +240,14 @@ public:
|
||||
to the name to ensure that the plugin which is going to be loaded will be
|
||||
compatible with the main program.
|
||||
The possible values for @a cat are:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxDL_PLUGIN_GUI
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
plugin which uses GUI classes (default)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxDL_PLUGIN_BASE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
plugin which only uses wxBase
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxString CanonicalizePluginName(const wxString& name,
|
||||
@ -269,7 +269,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns pointer to symbol @a name in the library or @NULL if the library
|
||||
contains no such symbol.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxDYNLIB_FUNCTION()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void* GetSymbol(const wxString& name) const;
|
||||
@ -289,7 +289,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns @true if the symbol with the given @a name is present in the dynamic
|
||||
library, @false otherwise. Unlike GetSymbol(),
|
||||
this function doesn't log an error message if the symbol is not found.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@wxsince{2.5.4}
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool HasSymbol(const wxString& name) const;
|
||||
@ -312,33 +312,33 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Loads DLL with the given @a name into memory. The @a flags argument can
|
||||
be a combination of the following bits:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxDL_LAZY
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
equivalent of RTLD_LAZY under Unix, ignored elsewhere
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxDL_NOW
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
equivalent of RTLD_NOW under Unix, ignored elsewhere
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxDL_GLOBAL
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
equivalent of RTLD_GLOBAL under Unix, ignored elsewhere
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxDL_VERBATIM
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
don't try to append the appropriate extension to
|
||||
the library name (this is done by default).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxDL_DEFAULT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
default flags, same as wxDL_NOW currently
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxDL_QUIET
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
don't log an error message if the library couldn't be
|
||||
loaded.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Returns @true if the library was successfully loaded, @false otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Load(const wxString& name, int flags = wxDL_DEFAULT);
|
||||
|
@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructor, creating and showing a list box.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param parent
|
||||
Parent window. Must not be @NULL.
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Window style. See wxEditableListBox.
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
Window name.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Create()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxEditableListBox();
|
||||
|
@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ public:
|
||||
wxPLATFORM_CURRENT
|
||||
wxPLATFORM_CURRENT means the platform this binary was compiled for.
|
||||
Examples:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Equivalence is defined in terms of convertibility:
|
||||
two encodings are equivalent if you can convert text between
|
||||
then without losing information (it may - and will - happen
|
||||
@ -100,19 +100,19 @@ public:
|
||||
it more than once in order to switch to another conversion.
|
||||
@e Method affects behaviour of Convert() in case input character
|
||||
cannot be converted because it does not exist in output encoding:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b wxCONVERT_STRICT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
follow behaviour of GNU Recode -
|
||||
just copy unconvertible characters to output and don't change them
|
||||
(its integer value will stay the same)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b wxCONVERT_SUBSTITUTE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
try some (lossy) substitutions
|
||||
- e.g. replace unconvertible latin capitals with acute by ordinary
|
||||
capitals, replace en-dash or em-dash by '-' etc.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Both modes guarantee that output string will have same length
|
||||
as input string.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
@ -121,12 +121,12 @@ public:
|
||||
Notice that this function is easier to use correctly than, for example,
|
||||
ControlDown() because when using the latter you
|
||||
also have to remember to test that none of the other modifiers is pressed:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
and forgetting to do it can result in serious program bugs (e.g. program not
|
||||
working with European keyboard layout where ALTGR key which is seen by
|
||||
the program as combination of CTRL and ALT is used). On the
|
||||
other hand, you can simply write
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
with this function.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetModifiers() const;
|
||||
@ -277,7 +277,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the event was a down event from the specified button (or any
|
||||
button).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param button
|
||||
Can be wxJOY_BUTTONn where n is 1, 2, 3 or 4; or wxJOY_BUTTON_ANY to
|
||||
indicate any button down event.
|
||||
@ -286,7 +286,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the specified button (or any button) was in a down state.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param button
|
||||
Can be wxJOY_BUTTONn where n is 1, 2, 3 or 4; or wxJOY_BUTTON_ANY to
|
||||
indicate any button down event.
|
||||
@ -296,7 +296,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the event was an up event from the specified button (or any
|
||||
button).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param button
|
||||
Can be wxJOY_BUTTONn where n is 1, 2, 3 or 4; or wxJOY_BUTTON_ANY to
|
||||
indicate any button down event.
|
||||
@ -523,7 +523,7 @@ public:
|
||||
the interval is set to 0; so update events will be sent as
|
||||
often as possible. You can reduce the frequency that events
|
||||
are sent by changing the mode and/or setting an update interval.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see ResetUpdateTime(), SetUpdateInterval(),
|
||||
SetMode()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@ -604,7 +604,7 @@ public:
|
||||
current time. It is assumed that update events are
|
||||
normally sent in idle time, so this is called at the end of
|
||||
idle processing.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see CanUpdate(), SetUpdateInterval(),
|
||||
SetMode()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@ -748,7 +748,7 @@ class wxMouseEvent : public wxEvent
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructor. Valid event types are:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b wxEVT_ENTER_WINDOW
|
||||
@b wxEVT_LEAVE_WINDOW
|
||||
@b wxEVT_LEFT_DOWN
|
||||
@ -823,29 +823,29 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the identified mouse button is changing state. Valid
|
||||
values of @a button are:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@c wxMOUSE_BTN_LEFT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
check if left button was pressed
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@c wxMOUSE_BTN_MIDDLE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
check if middle button was pressed
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@c wxMOUSE_BTN_RIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
check if right button was pressed
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@c wxMOUSE_BTN_AUX1
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
check if the first extra button was pressed
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@c wxMOUSE_BTN_AUX2
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
check if the second extra button was pressed
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@c wxMOUSE_BTN_ANY
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
check if any button was pressed
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Button(int button);
|
||||
@ -877,7 +877,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Same as MetaDown() under Mac, same as
|
||||
ControlDown() elsewhere.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxKeyEvent::CmdDown
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool CmdDown() const;
|
||||
@ -889,7 +889,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if this was a dragging event (motion while a button is depressed).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Moving()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Dragging();
|
||||
@ -915,7 +915,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Currently this function is implemented only in wxMac and returns -1 for the
|
||||
other platforms (you can still distinguish simple clicks from double-clicks as
|
||||
they generate different kinds of events however).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@wxsince{2.9.0}
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetClickCount() const;
|
||||
@ -1512,7 +1512,7 @@ class wxChildFocusEvent : public wxCommandEvent
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructor.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param win
|
||||
The direct child which is (or which contains the window which is) receiving
|
||||
the focus.
|
||||
@ -1650,25 +1650,25 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the origin of the help event which is one of the following values:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b Origin_Unknown
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Unrecognized event source.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b Origin_Keyboard
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Event generated by @c F1 key press.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b Origin_HelpButton
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Event generated by
|
||||
wxContextHelp or using the "?" title bur button under
|
||||
MS Windows.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The application may handle events generated using the keyboard or mouse
|
||||
differently, e.g. by using wxGetMousePosition()
|
||||
for the mouse events.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetOrigin()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxHelpEvent::Origin GetOrigin() const;
|
||||
@ -1681,7 +1681,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Set the help event origin, only used internally by wxWidgets normally.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetOrigin()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetOrigin(wxHelpEvent::Origin origin);
|
||||
@ -1780,7 +1780,7 @@ public:
|
||||
the update mode is initially wxIDLE_PROCESS_ALL. You can change the mode
|
||||
to only send idle events to windows with the wxWS_EX_PROCESS_IDLE extra window
|
||||
style set.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetMode()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static bool CanSend(wxWindow* window);
|
||||
@ -1796,7 +1796,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the OnIdle function processing this event requested more
|
||||
processing time.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see RequestMore()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool MoreRequested() const;
|
||||
@ -1811,7 +1811,7 @@ public:
|
||||
during OnIdle, then the application will remain in a passive event loop (not
|
||||
calling OnIdle) until a
|
||||
new event is posted to the application by the windowing system.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see MoreRequested()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void RequestMore(bool needMore = true);
|
||||
@ -2221,10 +2221,10 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
This function posts an event to be processed later.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param event
|
||||
Event to add to process queue.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks The difference between sending an event (using the ProcessEvent
|
||||
method) and posting it is that in the first case the
|
||||
event is processed before the function returns, while
|
||||
@ -2240,7 +2240,7 @@ public:
|
||||
type. This
|
||||
is an alternative to the use of static event tables. See the 'event' or the old
|
||||
'dynamic' sample for usage.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
The identifier (or first of the identifier range) to be
|
||||
associated with the event handler function. For the version not taking this
|
||||
@ -2283,7 +2283,7 @@ public:
|
||||
added
|
||||
using the Connect() method. There is no way
|
||||
to disconnect functions connected using the (static) event tables.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
The identifier (or first of the identifier range) associated with the event
|
||||
handler function.
|
||||
@ -2317,32 +2317,32 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets user-supplied client data.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks Normally, any extra data the programmer wishes to associate with
|
||||
the object should be made available by deriving a new
|
||||
class with new data members.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetClientData()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void* GetClientData();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Get a pointer to the user-supplied client data object.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetClientObject(), wxClientData
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxClientData* GetClientObject() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the event handler is enabled, @false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetEvtHandlerEnabled()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetEvtHandlerEnabled();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the pointer to the next handler in the chain.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetNextHandler(), GetPreviousHandler(),
|
||||
SetPreviousHandler(), wxWindow::PushEventHandler,
|
||||
wxWindow::PopEventHandler
|
||||
@ -2351,7 +2351,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the pointer to the previous handler in the chain.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetPreviousHandler(), GetNextHandler(),
|
||||
SetNextHandler(), wxWindow::PushEventHandler,
|
||||
wxWindow::PopEventHandler
|
||||
@ -2361,18 +2361,18 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Processes an event, searching event tables and calling zero or more suitable
|
||||
event handler function(s).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param event
|
||||
Event to process.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if a suitable event handler function was found and
|
||||
executed, and the function did not call wxEvent::Skip.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks Normally, your application would not call this function: it is
|
||||
called in the wxWidgets implementation to dispatch
|
||||
incoming user interface events to the framework (and
|
||||
application).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SearchEventTable()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual bool ProcessEvent(wxEvent& event);
|
||||
@ -2382,13 +2382,13 @@ public:
|
||||
and handles any exceptions that occur in the process. If an exception is
|
||||
thrown in event handler, wxApp::OnExceptionInMainLoop
|
||||
is called.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param event
|
||||
Event to process.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if the event was processed, @false if no handler was found
|
||||
or an exception was thrown.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxWindow::HandleWindowEvent
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool SafelyProcessEvent(wxEvent& event);
|
||||
@ -2397,18 +2397,18 @@ public:
|
||||
Searches the event table, executing an event handler function if an appropriate
|
||||
one
|
||||
is found.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param table
|
||||
Event table to be searched.
|
||||
@param event
|
||||
Event to be matched against an event table entry.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if a suitable event handler function was found and
|
||||
executed, and the function did not call wxEvent::Skip.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks This function looks through the object's event table and tries
|
||||
to find an entry that will match the event.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see ProcessEvent()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual bool SearchEventTable(wxEventTable& table,
|
||||
@ -2416,47 +2416,47 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets user-supplied client data.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param data
|
||||
Data to be associated with the event handler.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks Normally, any extra data the programmer wishes to associate with
|
||||
the object should be made available by deriving a new
|
||||
class with new data members. You must not call this
|
||||
method and SetClientObject on the same class - only one
|
||||
of them.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetClientData()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetClientData(void* data);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Set the client data object. Any previous object will be deleted.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetClientObject(), wxClientData
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetClientObject(wxClientData* data);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Enables or disables the event handler.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param enabled
|
||||
@true if the event handler is to be enabled, @false if it is to be disabled.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks You can use this function to avoid having to remove the event
|
||||
handler from the chain, for example when implementing a
|
||||
dialog editor and changing from edit to test mode.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetEvtHandlerEnabled()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetEvtHandlerEnabled(bool enabled);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the pointer to the next handler.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param handler
|
||||
Event handler to be set as the next handler.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetNextHandler(), SetPreviousHandler(),
|
||||
GetPreviousHandler(), wxWindow::PushEventHandler,
|
||||
wxWindow::PopEventHandler
|
||||
@ -2465,7 +2465,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the pointer to the previous handler.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param handler
|
||||
Event handler to be set as the previous handler.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@ -2767,7 +2767,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the cursor specified by this event is a valid cursor.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks You cannot specify wxNullCursor with this event, as it is not
|
||||
considered a valid cursor.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Opens a file with the given file pointer, which has already been opened.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param filename
|
||||
The filename.
|
||||
@param mode
|
||||
@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ public:
|
||||
read.
|
||||
Also note that this method may only be called for opened files and may crash if
|
||||
the file is not opened.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see IsOpened()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Eof() const;
|
||||
@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ public:
|
||||
@c ferror() function.
|
||||
Please note that this method may only be called for opened files and may crash
|
||||
if the file is not opened.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see IsOpened()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Opens the file, returning @true if successful.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param filename
|
||||
The filename.
|
||||
@param mode
|
||||
@ -127,12 +127,12 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Reads the specified number of bytes into a buffer, returning the actual number
|
||||
read.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param buffer
|
||||
A buffer to receive the data.
|
||||
@param count
|
||||
The number of bytes to read.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns The number of bytes read.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
size_t Read(void* buffer, size_t count);
|
||||
@ -140,20 +140,20 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
)
|
||||
Reads the entire contents of the file into a string.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param str
|
||||
String to read data into.
|
||||
@param conv
|
||||
Conversion object to use in Unicode build; by default supposes
|
||||
that file contents is encoded in UTF-8.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if file was read successfully, @false otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool ReadAll(wxString* str);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Seeks to the specified position and returns @true on success.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param ofs
|
||||
Offset to seek to.
|
||||
@param mode
|
||||
@ -165,7 +165,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Moves the file pointer to the specified number of bytes before the end of the
|
||||
file
|
||||
and returns @true on success.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param ofs
|
||||
Number of bytes before the end of the file.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Associates the file with the given file descriptor, which has already been
|
||||
opened.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param filename
|
||||
The filename.
|
||||
@param mode
|
||||
@ -254,7 +254,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Opens the file, returning @true if successful.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param filename
|
||||
The filename.
|
||||
@param mode
|
||||
@ -275,12 +275,12 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Seeks to the specified position.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param ofs
|
||||
Offset to seek to.
|
||||
@param mode
|
||||
One of wxFromStart, wxFromEnd, wxFromCurrent.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns The actual offset position achieved, or wxInvalidOffset on
|
||||
failure.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@ -291,10 +291,10 @@ public:
|
||||
Moves the file pointer to the specified number of bytes relative to the end of
|
||||
the file. For example, @c SeekEnd(-5) would position the pointer 5
|
||||
bytes before the end.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param ofs
|
||||
Number of bytes before the end of the file.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns The actual offset position achieved, or wxInvalidOffset on
|
||||
failure.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ public:
|
||||
)
|
||||
Read the config data from the specified stream instead of the associated file,
|
||||
as usual.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Save()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxFileConfig(wxInputStream& is);
|
||||
@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ public:
|
||||
after saving it successfully, the dirty flag is reset so no changes will be
|
||||
written back to the file this object is associated with until you change its
|
||||
contents again.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxConfigBase::Flush
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Save(wxOutputStream& os);
|
||||
@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ public:
|
||||
some sensitive information, such as passwords), you could use
|
||||
@c SetUmask(0077).
|
||||
This function doesn't do anything on non-Unix platforms.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxCHANGE_UMASK()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetUmask(int mode);
|
||||
|
@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Initial size.
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
Control name.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if the control was successfully created or @false if
|
||||
creation failed.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ public:
|
||||
function should only be used with the controls having the @c wxFC_MULTIPLE
|
||||
style,
|
||||
use GetFilename() for the others.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks filenames is emptied first.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void GetFilenames(wxArrayString& filenames) const;
|
||||
@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Fills the array @a paths with the full paths of the files chosen. This
|
||||
function should be used with the controls having the @c wxFC_MULTIPLE style,
|
||||
use GetPath() otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks paths is emptied first.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void GetPaths(wxArrayString& paths) const;
|
||||
@ -139,14 +139,14 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets(changes) the current directory displayed in the control.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns Returns @true on success, @false otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool SetDirectory(const wxString& directory);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Selects a certain file.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns Returns @true on success, @false otherwise
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool SetFilename(const wxString& filename);
|
||||
|
@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ class wxFileDialog : public wxDialog
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructor. Use ShowModal() to show the dialog.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param parent
|
||||
Parent window.
|
||||
@param message
|
||||
|
@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Makes this object refer to the current working directory on the specified
|
||||
volume (or current volume if @a volume is empty).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetCwd()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static void AssignCwd(const wxString& volume = wxEmptyString);
|
||||
@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Removes the extension from the file name resulting in a
|
||||
file name with no trailing dot.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetExt(), SetEmptyExt()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetClearExt();
|
||||
@ -172,12 +172,12 @@ public:
|
||||
If @a fileTemp is @NULL, the file is only created, but not opened.
|
||||
Under Unix, the temporary file will have read and write permissions for the
|
||||
owner only to minimize the security problems.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param prefix
|
||||
Prefix to use for the temporary file name construction
|
||||
@param fileTemp
|
||||
The file to open or @NULL to just get the name
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns The full temporary file name or an empty string on error.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxString CreateTempFileName(const wxString& prefix,
|
||||
@ -202,37 +202,37 @@ public:
|
||||
These functions allow to examine and modify the individual directories of the
|
||||
path:
|
||||
AppendDir()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
InsertDir()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetDirCount()
|
||||
PrependDir()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
RemoveDir()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
RemoveLastDir()
|
||||
To change the components of the file name individually you can use the
|
||||
following functions:
|
||||
GetExt()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetName()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetVolume()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
HasExt()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
HasName()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
HasVolume()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetExt()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ClearExt()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetEmptyExt()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetName()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetVolume()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@ -240,21 +240,21 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
You can initialize a wxFileName instance using one of the following functions:
|
||||
@ref wxfilename() "wxFileName constructors"
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Assign()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
AssignCwd()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
AssignDir()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
AssignHomeDir()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref assigntempfilename() AssignHomeTempFileName
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
DirName()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
FileName()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref operatorassign() "operator ="
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@ -300,13 +300,13 @@ public:
|
||||
or @ref operatorequal() "operator ==".
|
||||
For testing basic access modes, you can use:
|
||||
IsDirWritable()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsDirReadable()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsFileWritable()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsFileReadable()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsFileExecutable()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@ -314,7 +314,7 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the file with this name exists.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see DirExists()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool FileExists();
|
||||
@ -332,10 +332,10 @@ public:
|
||||
Retrieves the value of the current working directory on the specified volume. If
|
||||
the volume is empty, the program's current working directory is returned for the
|
||||
current volume.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns The string containing the current working directory or an empty
|
||||
string on error.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see AssignCwd()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxString GetCwd(const wxString& volume = "");
|
||||
@ -414,7 +414,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the name part of the filename (without extension).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetFullName()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetName() const;
|
||||
@ -422,15 +422,15 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the path part of the filename (without the name or extension). The
|
||||
possible flags values are:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b wxPATH_GET_VOLUME
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Return the path with the volume (does
|
||||
nothing for the filename formats without volumes), otherwise the path without
|
||||
volume part is returned.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b wxPATH_GET_SEPARATOR
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Return the path with the trailing
|
||||
separator, if this flag is not given there will be no separator at the end of
|
||||
the path.
|
||||
@ -443,7 +443,7 @@ public:
|
||||
@c wxPATH_DOS there is only one path separator anyhow, but for DOS there
|
||||
are two of them and the native one, i.e. the backslash is returned by this
|
||||
method.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetPathSeparators()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxChar GetPathSeparator(wxPathFormat format = wxPATH_NATIVE);
|
||||
@ -453,7 +453,7 @@ public:
|
||||
formats but @c wxPATH_DOS this string contains only one character but for
|
||||
DOS and Windows both @c '/' and @c '\' may be used as
|
||||
separators.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetPathSeparator()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxString GetPathSeparators(wxPathFormat format = wxPATH_NATIVE);
|
||||
@ -510,7 +510,7 @@ public:
|
||||
file specified by GetFullPath().
|
||||
Any of the pointers may be @NULL if the corresponding time is not
|
||||
needed.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true on success, @false if we failed to retrieve the times.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetTimes(wxDateTime* dtAccess, wxDateTime* dtMod,
|
||||
@ -662,7 +662,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Make the file name absolute. This is a shortcut for
|
||||
@c wxFileName::Normalize(wxPATH_NORM_DOTS | wxPATH_NORM_ABSOLUTE |
|
||||
wxPATH_NORM_TILDE, cwd, format).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see MakeRelativeTo(), Normalize(), IsAbsolute()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool MakeAbsolute(const wxString& cwd = wxEmptyString,
|
||||
@ -670,22 +670,22 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
This function tries to put this file name in a form relative to
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param pathBase.
|
||||
In other words, it returns the file name which should be used to access this
|
||||
file if the current directory were pathBase.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
pathBase
|
||||
the directory to use as root, current directory is used by
|
||||
default
|
||||
@param format
|
||||
the file name format, native by default
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if the file name has been changed, @false if we failed to do
|
||||
anything with it (currently this only happens if the
|
||||
file name is on a volume different from the volume
|
||||
specified by pathBase).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Normalize()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool MakeRelativeTo(const wxString& pathBase = wxEmptyString,
|
||||
@ -701,7 +701,7 @@ public:
|
||||
if the flags contain wxPATH_MKDIR_FULL flag,
|
||||
try to create each directory in the path and also don't return an error
|
||||
if the target directory already exists.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns Returns @true if the directory was successfully created, @false
|
||||
otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@ -714,106 +714,106 @@ public:
|
||||
Normalize the path. With the default flags value, the path will be
|
||||
made absolute, without any ".." and "." and all environment
|
||||
variables will be expanded in it.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param flags
|
||||
The kind of normalization to do with the file name. It can be
|
||||
any or-combination of the following constants:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxPATH_NORM_ENV_VARS
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
replace env vars with their values
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxPATH_NORM_DOTS
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
squeeze all .. and . when possible; if there are too many .. and thus they
|
||||
cannot be all removed, @false will be returned
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxPATH_NORM_CASE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
if filesystem is case insensitive, transform to lower case
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxPATH_NORM_ABSOLUTE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
make the path absolute prepending cwd
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxPATH_NORM_LONG
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
make the path the long form
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxPATH_NORM_SHORTCUT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
resolve if it is a shortcut (Windows only)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxPATH_NORM_TILDE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
replace ~ and ~user (Unix only)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxPATH_NORM_ALL
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
all of previous flags except wxPATH_NORM_CASE
|
||||
@param cwd
|
||||
If not empty, this directory will be used instead of current
|
||||
working directory in normalization (see wxPATH_NORM_ABSOLUTE).
|
||||
@param format
|
||||
The file name format to use when processing the paths, native by default.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if normalization was successfully or @false otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Normalize(int flags = wxPATH_NORM_ALL,
|
||||
@ -827,15 +827,15 @@ public:
|
||||
one day (so it is really the access date and not time). The access time may be
|
||||
updated when the file is executed or not depending on the platform.
|
||||
GetModificationTime()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetTimes()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetTimes()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Touch()
|
||||
Other file system operations functions are:
|
||||
Mkdir()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Rmdir()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@ -848,7 +848,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Removes the specified directory component from the path.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetDirCount()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void RemoveDir(size_t pos);
|
||||
@ -884,7 +884,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Sets the extension of the file name to be an empty extension.
|
||||
This is different from having no extension at all as the file
|
||||
name will have a trailing dot after a call to this method.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetExt(), ClearExt()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetEmptyExt();
|
||||
@ -894,7 +894,7 @@ public:
|
||||
as the extension will remove the extension resulting in a file
|
||||
name without a trailing dot, unlike a call to
|
||||
SetEmptyExt().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetEmptyExt(), ClearExt()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetExt(const wxString& ext);
|
||||
@ -906,7 +906,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the name part (without extension).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetFullName()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetName(const wxString& name);
|
||||
@ -962,7 +962,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Splits the given @a fullpath into the volume part (which may be empty) and
|
||||
the pure path part, not containing any volume.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SplitPath()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static void SplitVolume(const wxString& fullpath,
|
||||
|
@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Validator which can be used for additional date checks.
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
Control name.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if the control was successfully created or @false if
|
||||
creation failed.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@ -201,7 +201,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Validator which can be used for additional date checks.
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
Control name.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if the control was successfully created or @false if
|
||||
creation failed.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ public:
|
||||
@b Caution! Unless @a is_dir is @true the @a location parameter
|
||||
is not the directory name but the name of the file in this directory. All these
|
||||
commands change the path to "dir/subdir/":
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param location
|
||||
the new location. Its meaning depends on the value of is_dir
|
||||
@param is_dir
|
||||
@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Converts filename into URL.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see URLToFileName(), wxFileName
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxString FileNameToURL(wxFileName filename);
|
||||
@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ public:
|
||||
@e path. If the file is found in any directory, returns @true and the full
|
||||
path of the file in @e str, otherwise returns @false and doesn't modify
|
||||
@e str.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param str
|
||||
Receives the full path of the file, must not be @NULL
|
||||
@param path
|
||||
@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ public:
|
||||
absolute path. Note that the user is responsible for deleting the returned
|
||||
wxFSFile.
|
||||
@a flags can be one or more of the following bit values ored together:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A stream opened with just the default @e wxFS_READ flag may
|
||||
or may not be seekable depending on the underlying source.
|
||||
Passing @e wxFS_READ | wxFS_SEEKABLE for @a flags will
|
||||
@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ class wxFSFile : public wxObject
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructor. You probably won't use it. See Notes for details.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param stream
|
||||
The input stream that will be used to access data
|
||||
@param location
|
||||
@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns anchor (if present). The term of @b anchor can be easily
|
||||
explained using few examples:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Usually an anchor is presented only if the MIME type is 'text/html'.
|
||||
But it may have some meaning with other files;
|
||||
for example myanim.avi#200 may refer to position in animation
|
||||
@ -253,7 +253,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns @true if the handler is able to open this file. This function doesn't
|
||||
check whether the file exists or not, it only checks if it knows the protocol.
|
||||
Example:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Must be overridden in derived handlers.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual bool CanOpen(const wxString& location);
|
||||
@ -313,7 +313,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Opens the file and returns wxFSFile pointer or @NULL if failed.
|
||||
Must be overridden in derived handlers.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param fs
|
||||
Parent FS (the FS from that OpenFile was called). See ZIP handler
|
||||
for details of how to use it.
|
||||
|
554
interface/font.h
554
interface/font.h
@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Creates a font object with the specified attributes.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param pointSize
|
||||
Size in points.
|
||||
@param pixelSize
|
||||
@ -53,123 +53,123 @@ public:
|
||||
@param family
|
||||
Font family, a generic way of referring to fonts without specifying actual
|
||||
facename. One of:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTFAMILY_DEFAULT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Chooses a default font.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTFAMILY_DECORATIVE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A decorative font.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTFAMILY_ROMAN
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A formal, serif font.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTFAMILY_SCRIPT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A handwriting font.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTFAMILY_SWISS
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A sans-serif font.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTFAMILY_MODERN
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A fixed pitch font.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTFAMILY_TELETYPE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A teletype font.
|
||||
@param style
|
||||
One of wxFONTSTYLE_NORMAL, wxFONTSTYLE_SLANT and wxFONTSTYLE_ITALIC.
|
||||
@param weight
|
||||
Font weight, sometimes also referred to as font boldness. One of:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTWEIGHT_NORMAL
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Normal font.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTWEIGHT_LIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Light font.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTWEIGHT_BOLD
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Bold font.
|
||||
@param underline
|
||||
The value can be @true or @false. At present this has an effect on Windows
|
||||
@ -180,75 +180,75 @@ public:
|
||||
a default typeface will be chosen based on the family.
|
||||
@param encoding
|
||||
An encoding which may be one of
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTENCODING_SYSTEM
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Default system encoding.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTENCODING_DEFAULT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Default application encoding: this
|
||||
is the encoding set by calls to
|
||||
SetDefaultEncoding and which may be set to,
|
||||
say, KOI8 to create all fonts by default with KOI8 encoding. Initially, the
|
||||
default application encoding is the same as default system encoding.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTENCODING_ISO8859_1...15
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ISO8859 encodings.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTENCODING_KOI8
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The standard Russian encoding for Internet.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTENCODING_CP1250...1252
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Windows encodings similar to ISO8859 (but not identical).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
If the specified encoding isn't available, no font is created
|
||||
(see also font encoding overview).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks If the desired font does not exist, the closest match will be
|
||||
chosen. Under Windows, only scalable TrueType fonts are
|
||||
used.
|
||||
@ -271,7 +271,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Destructor.
|
||||
See @ref overview_refcountdestruct "reference-counted object destruction" for
|
||||
more info.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks Although all remaining fonts are deleted when the application
|
||||
exits, the application should try to clean up all fonts
|
||||
itself. This is because wxWidgets cannot know if a
|
||||
@ -282,7 +282,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the current application's default encoding.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see @ref overview_wxfontencodingoverview, SetDefaultEncoding()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxFontEncoding GetDefaultEncoding();
|
||||
@ -291,7 +291,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns the typeface name associated with the font, or the empty string if
|
||||
there is no
|
||||
typeface information.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetFaceName()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetFaceName() const;
|
||||
@ -299,7 +299,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the font family. See SetFamily() for a list of valid
|
||||
family identifiers.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetFamily()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxFontFamily GetFamily() const;
|
||||
@ -310,7 +310,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Note that the returned string is not meant to be shown or edited by the user: a
|
||||
typical
|
||||
use of this function is for serializing in string-form a wxFont object.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetNativeFontInfo(),GetNativeFontInfoUserDesc()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetNativeFontInfoDesc() const;
|
||||
@ -320,14 +320,14 @@ public:
|
||||
non-empty.
|
||||
Some examples of the formats of returned strings (which are platform-dependent)
|
||||
are in SetNativeFontInfoUserDesc().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetNativeFontInfoDesc()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetNativeFontInfoUserDesc();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the point size.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetPointSize()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetPointSize() const;
|
||||
@ -335,14 +335,14 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the font style. See wxFont() for a list of valid
|
||||
styles.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetStyle()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetStyle() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the font is underlined, @false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetUnderlined()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetUnderlined() const;
|
||||
@ -350,7 +350,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the font weight. See wxFont() for a list of valid
|
||||
weight identifiers.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetWeight()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxFontWeight GetWeight() const;
|
||||
@ -398,7 +398,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the default font encoding.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see @ref overview_wxfontencodingoverview, GetDefaultEncoding()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static void SetDefaultEncoding(wxFontEncoding encoding);
|
||||
@ -406,106 +406,106 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the facename for the font.
|
||||
Returns @true if the given face name exists; @false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param faceName
|
||||
A valid facename, which should be on the end-user's system.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks To avoid portability problems, don't rely on a specific face,
|
||||
but specify the font family instead or as well. A
|
||||
suitable font will be found on the end-user's system.
|
||||
If both the family and the facename are specified,
|
||||
wxWidgets will first search for the specific face, and
|
||||
then for a font belonging to the same family.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetFaceName(), SetFamily()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool SetFaceName(const wxString& faceName);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the font family.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param family
|
||||
One of:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTFAMILY_DEFAULT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Chooses a default font.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTFAMILY_DECORATIVE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A decorative font.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTFAMILY_ROMAN
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A formal, serif font.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTFAMILY_SCRIPT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A handwriting font.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTFAMILY_SWISS
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A sans-serif font.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTFAMILY_MODERN
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A fixed pitch font.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTFAMILY_TELETYPE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A teletype font.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetFamily(), SetFaceName()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetFamily(wxFontFamily family);
|
||||
@ -519,7 +519,7 @@ public:
|
||||
invalid, font is unchanged. This function is typically used for de-serializing
|
||||
a wxFont
|
||||
object previously saved in a string-form.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetNativeFontInfoUserDesc()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool SetNativeFontInfo(const wxString& info);
|
||||
@ -531,101 +531,101 @@ public:
|
||||
Unlike SetNativeFontInfo(), this function accepts
|
||||
strings which are user-friendly.
|
||||
Examples of accepted string formats are:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Generic syntax
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Example
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
on @b wxGTK2: @c [FACE-NAME] [bold] [oblique|italic] [POINTSIZE]
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Monospace bold 10
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
on @b wxMSW: @c [light|bold] [italic] [FACE-NAME] [POINTSIZE] [ENCODING]
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Tahoma 10 WINDOWS-1252
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
on @b wxMac: FIXME
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
FIXME
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
For more detailed information about the allowed syntaxes you can look at the
|
||||
documentation of the native API used for font-rendering (e.g. pango_font_description_from_string).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetNativeFontInfo()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool SetNativeFontInfoUserDesc(const wxString& info);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the point size.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param pointSize
|
||||
Size in points.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetPointSize()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetPointSize(int pointSize);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the font style.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param style
|
||||
One of wxFONTSTYLE_NORMAL, wxFONTSTYLE_SLANT and wxFONTSTYLE_ITALIC.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetStyle()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetStyle(int style);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets underlining.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param underlining
|
||||
@true to underline, @false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetUnderlined()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetUnderlined(const bool underlined);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the font weight.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param weight
|
||||
One of:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTWEIGHT_NORMAL
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Normal font.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTWEIGHT_LIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Light font.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTWEIGHT_BOLD
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Bold font.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetWeight()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetWeight(wxFontWeight weight);
|
||||
|
@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Get the current font mapper object. If there is no current object, creates
|
||||
one.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Set()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxFontMapper* Get();
|
||||
@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Return internal string identifier for the encoding (see also
|
||||
wxFontMapper::GetEncodingDescription)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetEncodingFromName()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxString GetEncodingName(wxFontEncoding encoding);
|
||||
@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Set the current font mapper object and return previous one (may be @NULL).
|
||||
This method is only useful if you want to plug-in an alternative font mapper
|
||||
into wxWidgets.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Get()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxFontMapper* Set(wxFontMapper* mapper);
|
||||
|
@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Validator which can be used for additional date checks.
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
Control name.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if the control was successfully created or @false if
|
||||
creation failed.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructor, creating the window.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param parent
|
||||
The window parent. This may be @NULL. If it is non-@NULL, the frame will
|
||||
always be displayed on top of the parent window on Windows.
|
||||
@ -113,11 +113,11 @@ public:
|
||||
item,
|
||||
allowing the application user to set Motif resource values for
|
||||
individual windows.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks For Motif, MWM (the Motif Window Manager) should be running for
|
||||
any window styles to work (otherwise all styles take
|
||||
effect).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Create()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxFrame();
|
||||
@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Centres the frame on the display.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param direction
|
||||
The parameter may be wxHORIZONTAL, wxVERTICAL or wxBOTH.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Creates a status bar at the bottom of the frame.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param number
|
||||
The number of fields to create. Specify a
|
||||
value greater than 1 to create a multi-field status bar.
|
||||
@ -167,14 +167,14 @@ public:
|
||||
wxWidgets.
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
The status bar window name.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns A pointer to the status bar if it was created successfully, @NULL
|
||||
otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks The width of the status bar is the whole width of the frame
|
||||
(adjusted automatically when resizing), and the height
|
||||
and text size are chosen by the host windowing system.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetStatusText(), OnCreateStatusBar(), GetStatusBar()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual wxStatusBar* CreateStatusBar(int number = 1,
|
||||
@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Creates a toolbar at the top or left of the frame.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param style
|
||||
The toolbar style. See wxToolBar for a list
|
||||
of valid styles.
|
||||
@ -193,15 +193,15 @@ public:
|
||||
wxWidgets.
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
The toolbar window name.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns A pointer to the toolbar if it was created successfully, @NULL
|
||||
otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks By default, the toolbar is an instance of wxToolBar (which is
|
||||
defined to be a suitable toolbar class on each
|
||||
platform, such as wxToolBar95). To use a different
|
||||
class, override OnCreateToolBar().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see CreateStatusBar(), OnCreateToolBar(), SetToolBar(),
|
||||
GetToolBar()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a pointer to the menubar currently associated with the frame (if any).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetMenuBar(), wxMenuBar, wxMenu
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxMenuBar* GetMenuBar() const;
|
||||
@ -225,28 +225,28 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a pointer to the status bar currently associated with the frame (if
|
||||
any).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see CreateStatusBar(), wxStatusBar
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxStatusBar* GetStatusBar() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the status bar pane used to display menu and toolbar help.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetStatusBarPane()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetStatusBarPane();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a pointer to the toolbar currently associated with the frame (if any).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see CreateToolBar(), wxToolBar, SetToolBar()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxToolBar* GetToolBar() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Virtual function called when a status bar is requested by CreateStatusBar().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param number
|
||||
The number of fields to create.
|
||||
@param style
|
||||
@ -257,13 +257,13 @@ public:
|
||||
wxWidgets.
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
The window name.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns A status bar object.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks An application can override this function to return a different
|
||||
kind of status bar. The default implementation returns
|
||||
an instance of wxStatusBar.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see CreateStatusBar(), wxStatusBar.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual wxStatusBar* OnCreateStatusBar(int number, long style,
|
||||
@ -272,7 +272,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Virtual function called when a toolbar is requested by CreateToolBar().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param style
|
||||
The toolbar style. See wxToolBar for a list
|
||||
of valid styles.
|
||||
@ -281,13 +281,13 @@ public:
|
||||
wxWidgets.
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
The toolbar window name.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns A toolbar object.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks An application can override this function to return a different
|
||||
kind of toolbar. The default implementation returns an
|
||||
instance of wxToolBar.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see CreateToolBar(), wxToolBar.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual wxToolBar* OnCreateToolBar(long style, wxWindowID id,
|
||||
@ -295,7 +295,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Simulate a menu command.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
The identifier for a menu item.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@ -314,22 +314,22 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Tells the frame to show the given menu bar.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param menuBar
|
||||
The menu bar to associate with the frame.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks If the frame is destroyed, the menu bar and its menus will be
|
||||
destroyed also, so do not delete the menu bar
|
||||
explicitly (except by resetting the frame's menu bar to
|
||||
another frame or @NULL).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetMenuBar(), wxMenuBar, wxMenu.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetMenuBar(wxMenuBar* menuBar);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Associates a status bar with the frame.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see CreateStatusBar(), wxStatusBar, GetStatusBar()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetStatusBar(wxStatusBar* statusBar);
|
||||
@ -342,21 +342,21 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the status bar text and redraws the status bar.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param text
|
||||
The text for the status field.
|
||||
@param number
|
||||
The status field (starting from zero).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks Use an empty string to clear the status bar.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see CreateStatusBar(), wxStatusBar
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void SetStatusText(const wxString& text, int number = 0);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the widths of the fields in the status bar.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param n
|
||||
The number of fields in the status bar. It must be the
|
||||
same used in CreateStatusBar.
|
||||
@ -366,7 +366,7 @@ public:
|
||||
least one
|
||||
field must be -1. You should delete this array after calling
|
||||
SetStatusWidths.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks The widths of the variable fields are calculated from the total
|
||||
width of all fields, minus the sum of widths of the
|
||||
non-variable fields, divided by the number of variable
|
||||
|
@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Note that you must use a @a type value (aka image format)
|
||||
that wxWidgets can save (e.g. JPG, PNG, see wxImage
|
||||
documentation())!
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see AddFileWithMimeType()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static void AddFile(const wxString& filename, wxImage& image,
|
||||
@ -96,9 +96,9 @@ public:
|
||||
Like AddFile(), but lets you explicitly
|
||||
specify added file's MIME type. This version should be used whenever you know
|
||||
the MIME type, because it makes accessing the files faster.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@wxsince{2.8.5}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see AddFile()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static void AddFileWithMimeType(const wxString& filename,
|
||||
|
@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructor, creating and showing a gauge.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param parent
|
||||
Window parent.
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Gauge style. See wxGauge.
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
Window name.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Create()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGauge();
|
||||
@ -94,32 +94,32 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the width of the 3D bezel face.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks This method is not implemented (returns 0) for most platforms.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetBezelFace()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetBezelFace() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the maximum position of the gauge.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetRange()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetRange() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the 3D shadow margin width.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks This method is not implemented (returns 0) for most platforms.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetShadowWidth()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetShadowWidth() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the current position of the gauge.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetValue()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetValue() const;
|
||||
@ -141,10 +141,10 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the 3D bezel face width.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks This method is not implemented (doesn't do anything) for most
|
||||
platforms.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetBezelFace()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetBezelFace(int width);
|
||||
@ -152,14 +152,14 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the range (maximum value) of the gauge.
|
||||
This function makes the gauge switch to determinate mode, if it's not already.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetRange()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetRange(int range);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the 3D shadow width.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks This method is not implemented (doesn't do anything) for most
|
||||
platforms.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@ -170,10 +170,10 @@ public:
|
||||
range as returned by GetRange(), inclusive.
|
||||
This function makes the gauge switch to determinate mode, if it was in
|
||||
indeterminate mode before.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param pos
|
||||
Position for the gauge level.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetValue()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetValue(int pos);
|
||||
|
@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ class wxGLContext : public wxObject
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructor.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param win
|
||||
The canvas that is used to initialize this context. This parameter is
|
||||
needed only temporarily,
|
||||
@ -121,9 +121,9 @@ public:
|
||||
Creates a window with the given parameters. Notice that you need to create and
|
||||
use a wxGLContext to output to this window.
|
||||
If
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param attribList is not specified, double buffered RGBA mode is used.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
parent
|
||||
Pointer to a parent window.
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
@ -165,7 +165,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Determines if a canvas having the specified attributes is available.
|
||||
Returns @true if attributes are supported.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param attribList
|
||||
See attribList for wxGLCanvas().
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ class wxGraphicsPath : public wxGraphicsObject
|
||||
public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void AddArc(wxDouble x, wxDouble y, wxDouble r,
|
||||
wxDouble startAngle,
|
||||
@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void AddCurveToPoint(wxDouble cx1, wxDouble cy1, wxDouble cx2,
|
||||
wxDouble cy2,
|
||||
@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void AddLineToPoint(wxDouble x, wxDouble y);
|
||||
void AddLineToPoint(const wxPoint2DDouble& p);
|
||||
@ -220,7 +220,7 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Creates a wxGraphicsContext from a wxWindow.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxGraphicsRenderer:: CreateContext
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGraphicsContext* Create(const wxWindowDC& dc);
|
||||
@ -242,9 +242,9 @@ public:
|
||||
Creates a wxGraphicsContext from a native context. This native context must be
|
||||
eg a CGContextRef for Core Graphics, a Graphics pointer for GDIPlus or a
|
||||
cairo_t pointer for cairo.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Creates a wxGraphicsContext from a native window.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxGraphicsRenderer:: CreateContextFromNativeContext
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGraphicsContext* CreateFromNative(void* context);
|
||||
@ -617,7 +617,7 @@ class wxGraphicsMatrix : public wxGraphicsObject
|
||||
public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Concat(const wxGraphicsMatrix* t);
|
||||
void Concat(const wxGraphicsMatrix& t);
|
||||
|
296
interface/grid.h
296
interface/grid.h
@ -70,27 +70,27 @@ class wxGridTableBase : public wxObject
|
||||
{
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGridTableBase();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
~wxGridTableBase();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool AppendCols(size_t numCols = 1);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool AppendRows(size_t numRows = 1);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool CanGetValueAs(int row, int col, const wxString& typeName);
|
||||
|
||||
@ -101,22 +101,22 @@ public:
|
||||
bool CanHaveAttributes();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool CanSetValueAs(int row, int col, const wxString& typeName);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Clear();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool DeleteCols(size_t pos = 0, size_t numCols = 1);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool DeleteRows(size_t pos = 0, size_t numRows = 1);
|
||||
|
||||
@ -132,12 +132,12 @@ public:
|
||||
wxGridCellAttrProvider* GetAttrProvider() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetColLabelValue(int col);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetNumberCols();
|
||||
|
||||
@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ public:
|
||||
int GetNumberRows();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetRowLabelValue(int row);
|
||||
|
||||
@ -157,12 +157,12 @@ public:
|
||||
wxString GetTypeName(int row, int col);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetValue(int row, int col);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetValueAsBool(int row, int col);
|
||||
|
||||
@ -173,32 +173,32 @@ public:
|
||||
const wxString& typeName);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetValueAsDouble(int row, int col);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
long GetValueAsLong(int row, int col);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGrid* GetView() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool InsertCols(size_t pos = 0, size_t numCols = 1);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool InsertRows(size_t pos = 0, size_t numRows = 1);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsEmptyCell(int row, int col);
|
||||
|
||||
@ -214,7 +214,7 @@ public:
|
||||
void SetAttrProvider(wxGridCellAttrProvider* attrProvider);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetColAttr(wxGridCellAttr* attr, int col);
|
||||
|
||||
@ -224,7 +224,7 @@ public:
|
||||
void SetColLabelValue() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetRowAttr(wxGridCellAttr* attr, int row);
|
||||
|
||||
@ -234,28 +234,28 @@ public:
|
||||
void SetRowLabelValue() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetValue(int row, int col, const wxString& value);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetValueAsBool(int row, int col, bool value);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetValueAsCustom(int row, int col, const wxString& typeName,
|
||||
void* value);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetValueAsDouble(int row, int col, double value);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetValueAsLong(int row, int col, long value);
|
||||
|
||||
@ -265,7 +265,7 @@ public:
|
||||
void SetView(wxGrid* grid);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void UpdateAttrCols(size_t pos, int numCols);
|
||||
|
||||
@ -297,7 +297,7 @@ class wxGridCellEditor
|
||||
{
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGridCellEditor();
|
||||
|
||||
@ -341,7 +341,7 @@ public:
|
||||
void HandleReturn(wxKeyEvent& event);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsCreated();
|
||||
|
||||
@ -489,7 +489,7 @@ class wxGridEditorCreatedEvent : public wxCommandEvent
|
||||
public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGridEditorCreatedEvent();
|
||||
wxGridEditorCreatedEvent(int id, wxEventType type,
|
||||
@ -545,7 +545,7 @@ class wxGridRangeSelectEvent : public wxNotifyEvent
|
||||
public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGridRangeSelectEvent();
|
||||
wxGridRangeSelectEvent(int id, wxEventType type,
|
||||
@ -638,7 +638,7 @@ class wxGridCellRenderer
|
||||
{
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGridCellRenderer* Clone() const;
|
||||
|
||||
@ -717,7 +717,7 @@ class wxGridSizeEvent : public wxNotifyEvent
|
||||
public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGridSizeEvent();
|
||||
wxGridSizeEvent(int id, wxEventType type, wxObject* obj,
|
||||
@ -817,7 +817,7 @@ public:
|
||||
wxGridCellAttr* Clone() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void DecRef();
|
||||
|
||||
@ -827,52 +827,52 @@ public:
|
||||
void GetAlignment(int* hAlign, int* vAlign) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxColour GetBackgroundColour() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGridCellEditor* GetEditor(wxGrid* grid, int row, int col) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxFont GetFont() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGridCellRenderer* GetRenderer(wxGrid* grid, int row, int col) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxColour GetTextColour() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool HasAlignment() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool HasBackgroundColour() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool HasEditor() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool HasFont() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool HasRenderer() const;
|
||||
|
||||
@ -889,7 +889,7 @@ public:
|
||||
void IncRef();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsReadOnly() const;
|
||||
|
||||
@ -906,12 +906,12 @@ public:
|
||||
void SetBackgroundColour(const wxColour& colBack);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetDefAttr(wxGridCellAttr* defAttr);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetEditor(wxGridCellEditor* editor);
|
||||
|
||||
@ -921,7 +921,7 @@ public:
|
||||
void SetFont(const wxFont& font);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetReadOnly(bool isReadOnly = true);
|
||||
|
||||
@ -976,7 +976,7 @@ class wxGridEvent : public wxNotifyEvent
|
||||
public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGridEvent();
|
||||
wxGridEvent(int id, wxEventType type, wxObject* obj,
|
||||
@ -1205,25 +1205,25 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
AutoSizeColumn()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
AutoSizeRow()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
AutoSizeColumns()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
AutoSizeRows()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
AutoSize()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetColMinimalWidth()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetRowMinimalHeight()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetColMinimalAcceptableWidth()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetRowMinimalAcceptableHeight()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetColMinimalAcceptableWidth()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetRowMinimalAcceptableHeight()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1236,7 +1236,7 @@ public:
|
||||
EndBatch(). Code that does a lot of grid
|
||||
modification can be enclosed between BeginBatch and EndBatch calls to avoid
|
||||
screen flicker. The final EndBatch will cause the grid to be repainted.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxGridUpdateLocker
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void BeginBatch();
|
||||
@ -1296,29 +1296,29 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
EnableDragRowSize()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
EnableDragColSize()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
CanDragRowSize()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
CanDragColSize()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
EnableDragColMove()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
CanDragColMove()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
EnableDragGridSize()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
CanDragGridSize()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetColAt()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetColPos()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetColPos()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
EnableDragCell()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
CanDragCell()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1348,11 +1348,11 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ref ctor() wxGrid
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref dtor() ~wxGrid
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
CreateGrid()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetTable()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1371,23 +1371,23 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
MoveCursorUp()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
MoveCursorDown()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
MoveCursorLeft()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
MoveCursorRight()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
MoveCursorPageUp()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
MoveCursorPageDown()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
MoveCursorUpBlock()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
MoveCursorDownBlock()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
MoveCursorLeftBlock()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
MoveCursorRightBlock()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1505,7 +1505,7 @@ public:
|
||||
EndBatch. Code that does a lot of grid modification can be enclosed between
|
||||
BeginBatch and EndBatch calls to avoid screen flicker. The final EndBatch will
|
||||
cause the grid to be repainted.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxGridUpdateLocker
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void EndBatch();
|
||||
@ -1533,7 +1533,7 @@ public:
|
||||
grid cell at the specified location.
|
||||
Horizontal alignment will be one of wxALIGN_LEFT, wxALIGN_CENTRE or
|
||||
wxALIGN_RIGHT.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Vertical alignment will be one of wxALIGN_TOP, wxALIGN_CENTRE or wxALIGN_BOTTOM.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void GetCellAlignment(int row, int col, int* horiz, int* vert) const;
|
||||
@ -1605,7 +1605,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Sets the arguments to the current column label alignment values.
|
||||
Horizontal alignment will be one of wxALIGN_LEFT, wxALIGN_CENTRE or
|
||||
wxALIGN_RIGHT.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Vertical alignment will be one of wxALIGN_TOP, wxALIGN_CENTRE or wxALIGN_BOTTOM.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void GetColLabelAlignment(int* horiz, int* vert) const;
|
||||
@ -1626,7 +1626,7 @@ public:
|
||||
wxString GetColLabelValue(int col) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetColLeft(int col) const;
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1648,7 +1648,7 @@ public:
|
||||
int GetColPos(int colID) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetColRight(int col) const;
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1662,7 +1662,7 @@ public:
|
||||
values.
|
||||
Horizontal alignment will be one of wxALIGN_LEFT, wxALIGN_CENTRE or
|
||||
wxALIGN_RIGHT.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Vertical alignment will be one of wxALIGN_TOP, wxALIGN_CENTRE or wxALIGN_BOTTOM.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void GetDefaultCellAlignment(int* horiz, int* vert) const;
|
||||
@ -1702,14 +1702,14 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGridCellEditor* GetDefaultEditorForCell(int row, int col) const;
|
||||
const wxGridCellEditor* GetDefaultEditorForCell(const wxGridCellCoords& c) const;
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGridCellEditor* GetDefaultEditorForType(const wxString& typeName) const;
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1717,7 +1717,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns the pen used for grid lines. This virtual function may be overridden in
|
||||
derived classes in order to change the appearance of grid lines. Note that
|
||||
currently the pen width must be 1.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetColGridLinePen(), GetRowGridLinePen()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxPen GetDefaultGridLinePen();
|
||||
@ -1731,12 +1731,12 @@ public:
|
||||
wxGridCellRenderer* GetDefaultRenderer() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGridCellRenderer* GetDefaultRendererForCell(int row, int col) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGridCellRenderer* GetDefaultRendererForType(const wxString& typeName) const;
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1762,7 +1762,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the colour used for grid lines.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetDefaultGridLinePen()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxColour GetGridLineColour() const;
|
||||
@ -1796,7 +1796,7 @@ public:
|
||||
int GetNumberRows() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGridCellAttr* GetOrCreateCellAttr(int row, int col) const;
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1811,7 +1811,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the arguments to the current row label alignment values.
|
||||
Horizontal alignment will be one of wxLEFT, wxCENTRE or wxRIGHT.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Vertical alignment will be one of wxTOP, wxCENTRE or wxBOTTOM.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void GetRowLabelAlignment(int* horiz, int* vert) const;
|
||||
@ -1838,7 +1838,7 @@ public:
|
||||
int GetRowMinimalAcceptableHeight() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetRowMinimalHeight(int col) const;
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1849,14 +1849,14 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the number of pixels per horizontal scroll increment. The default is 15.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetScrollLineY(), SetScrollLineX(), SetScrollLineY()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetScrollLineX() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the number of pixels per vertical scroll increment. The default is 15.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetScrollLineX(), SetScrollLineX(), SetScrollLineY()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetScrollLineY() const;
|
||||
@ -1894,7 +1894,7 @@ public:
|
||||
wxGridCellCoordsArray GetSelectionBlockTopLeft() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxColour GetSelectionForeground() const;
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1915,17 +1915,17 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
EnableGridLines()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GridLinesEnabled()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetGridLineColour()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetGridLineColour()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetDefaultGridLinePen()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetRowGridLinePen()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetColGridLinePen()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@ -2149,57 +2149,57 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
SetRowLabelValue()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetColLabelValue()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetRowLabelValue()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetColLabelValue()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetUseNativeColLabels()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
HideColLabels()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
HideRowLabels()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetRowLabelSize()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetColLabelSize()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetRowLabelSize()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetColLabelSize()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
AutoSizeRowLabelSize()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
AutoSizeColLabelSize()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetDefaultRowLabelSize()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetDefaultColLabelSize()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetRowLabelAlignment()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetColLabelAlignment()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetRowLabelAlignment()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetColLabelAlignment()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetLabelFont()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetLabelTextColour()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetLabelBackgroundColour()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetLabelFont()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetLabelBackgroundColour()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetLabelTextColour()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetColLabelTextOrientation()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetColLabelTextOrientation()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@ -2249,15 +2249,15 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
ClearSelection()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsSelection()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SelectAll()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SelectBlock()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SelectCol()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SelectRow()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@ -2274,7 +2274,7 @@ public:
|
||||
location.
|
||||
Horizontal alignment should be one of wxALIGN_LEFT, wxALIGN_CENTRE or
|
||||
wxALIGN_RIGHT.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Vertical alignment should be one of wxALIGN_TOP, wxALIGN_CENTRE or
|
||||
wxALIGN_BOTTOM.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@ -2283,7 +2283,7 @@ public:
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetCellBackgroundColour(int row, int col,
|
||||
const wxColour& colour);
|
||||
@ -2539,7 +2539,7 @@ public:
|
||||
int SetOrCalcColumnSizes(bool calcOnly, bool setAsMin = true);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int SetOrCalcRowSizes(bool calcOnly, bool setAsMin = true);
|
||||
|
||||
@ -2619,7 +2619,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Sets the number of pixels per horizontal scroll increment. The default is 15.
|
||||
Sometimes wxGrid has trouble setting the scrollbars correctly due to rounding
|
||||
errors: setting this to 1 can help.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetScrollLineX(), GetScrollLineY(), SetScrollLineY()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetScrollLineX(int x);
|
||||
@ -2628,24 +2628,24 @@ public:
|
||||
Sets the number of pixels per vertical scroll increment. The default is 15.
|
||||
Sometimes wxGrid has trouble setting the scrollbars correctly due to rounding
|
||||
errors: setting this to 1 can help.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetScrollLineX(), GetScrollLineY(), SetScrollLineX()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetScrollLineY(int y);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetSelectionBackground(const wxColour& c);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetSelectionForeground(const wxColour& c);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Set the selection behaviour of the grid.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param wxGridSelectCells()
|
||||
The default mode where individual cells are selected.
|
||||
@param wxGridSelectRows()
|
||||
|
@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ public:
|
||||
@e WinHelp, MS HTML Help @a sectionNo is a context id.
|
||||
@e External HTML help: wxExtHelpController implements @a sectionNo as an id in
|
||||
a map file, which is of the form:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@e wxHtmlHelpController: @a sectionNo is an identifier as specified in the @c
|
||||
.hhc file. See @ref overview_helpformat "Help files format".
|
||||
See also the help sample for notes on how to specify section numbers for
|
||||
@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ public:
|
||||
wxHtmlHelpController returns the frame, size and position.
|
||||
For all other help controllers, this function does nothing
|
||||
and just returns @NULL.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param viewer
|
||||
This defaults to "netscape" for wxExtHelpController.
|
||||
@param flags
|
||||
|
@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ public:
|
||||
wxVListBox::SetSelectionBackground allows to
|
||||
change the selection background for all cells at once and doing anything more
|
||||
fancy is probably going to look strangely.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetSelectedTextColour()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxColour GetSelectedTextBgColour(const wxColour& colBg) const;
|
||||
@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ public:
|
||||
look inside selection. By default all original colours are completely ignored
|
||||
and the standard, system-dependent, selection colour is used but the program
|
||||
may wish to override this to achieve some custom appearance.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetSelectedTextBgColour(),
|
||||
wxVListBox::SetSelectionBackground, wxSystemSettings::GetColour
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@ -117,12 +117,12 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Called when the user clicks on hypertext link. Does nothing by default.
|
||||
Overloading this method is deprecated; intercept the event instead.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param n
|
||||
Index of the item containing the link.
|
||||
@param link
|
||||
Description of the link.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see See also wxHtmlLinkInfo.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void OnLinkClicked(size_t n, const wxHtmlLinkInfo& link);
|
||||
|
@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ class wxHyperlinkCtrl : public wxControl
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Creates the hyperlink control.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param parent
|
||||
Parent window. Must not be @NULL.
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
|
232
interface/icon.h
232
interface/icon.h
@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Loads an icon from the specified location().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param bits
|
||||
Specifies an array of pixel values.
|
||||
@param width
|
||||
@ -66,68 +66,68 @@ public:
|
||||
wxIconLocation.
|
||||
@param type
|
||||
May be one of the following:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxBITMAP_TYPE_ICO
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Load a Windows icon file.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxBITMAP_TYPE_ICO_RESOURCE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Load a Windows icon from the resource database.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxBITMAP_TYPE_GIF
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Load a GIF bitmap file.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxBITMAP_TYPE_XBM
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Load an X bitmap file.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxBITMAP_TYPE_XPM
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Load an XPM bitmap file.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The validity of these flags depends on the platform and wxWidgets
|
||||
configuration.
|
||||
If all possible wxWidgets settings are used, the Windows platform supports
|
||||
@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ public:
|
||||
XPM data, XPM file, and PNG file.
|
||||
Under wxMotif, the available formats are XBM data, XBM file, XPM data, XPM
|
||||
file.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks The first form constructs an icon object with no data; an
|
||||
assignment or another member function such as Create or
|
||||
LoadFile must be called subsequently.
|
||||
@ -168,9 +168,9 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Copies @a bmp bitmap to this icon. Under MS Windows the bitmap
|
||||
must have mask colour set.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
LoadFile()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Wx::Icon-new( width, height, depth = -1 )
|
||||
Wx::Icon-new( name, type, desiredWidth = -1, desiredHeight = -1 )
|
||||
Wx::Icon-newFromBits( bits, width, height, depth = 1 )
|
||||
@ -191,7 +191,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the width of the icon in pixels.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetHeight()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetWidth() const;
|
||||
@ -203,86 +203,86 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Loads an icon from a file or resource.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
Either a filename or a Windows resource name.
|
||||
The meaning of name is determined by the type parameter.
|
||||
@param type
|
||||
One of the following values:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxBITMAP_TYPE_ICO
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Load a Windows icon file.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxBITMAP_TYPE_ICO_RESOURCE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Load a Windows icon from the resource database.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxBITMAP_TYPE_GIF
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Load a GIF bitmap file.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxBITMAP_TYPE_XBM
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Load an X bitmap file.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxBITMAP_TYPE_XPM
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Load an XPM bitmap file.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The validity of these flags depends on the platform and wxWidgets
|
||||
configuration.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if the operation succeeded, @false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxIcon()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool LoadFile(const wxString& name, wxBitmapType type);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the depth member (does not affect the icon data).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param depth
|
||||
Icon depth.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@ -290,7 +290,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the height member (does not affect the icon data).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param height
|
||||
Icon height in pixels.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@ -298,7 +298,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the width member (does not affect the icon data).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param width
|
||||
Icon width in pixels.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@ -306,7 +306,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Assignment operator, using @ref overview_trefcount "reference counting".
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param icon
|
||||
Icon to assign.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
1012
interface/image.h
1012
interface/image.h
File diff suppressed because it is too large
Load Diff
Some files were not shown because too many files have changed in this diff Show More
Loading…
Reference in New Issue
Block a user